RU2669856C2 - Surgical instrument, body for application with surgical instrument and surgical instrument assembly - Google Patents

Abstract

FIELD: medicine.

SUBSTANCE: group of inventions relates to medical equipment, specifically to surgical instruments. Surgical instrument comprises a shaft, an end effector extending distally from the shaft, and a housing extending proximally from the shaft. Housing comprises a first shroud portion, a second shroud portion, a working assembly and at least one securing member. Working assembly is nested in the first shroud portion. Working assembly comprises a guide and is detachable from the first shroud portion. Second shroud portion is removably attached to the first shroud portion to enable the working assembly to be detached from the first shroud portion. At least one securing member is engaged with the first shroud portion prior to attachment of the working assembly to the first shroud portion and is movable along the guide. At least one securing member is movable to attach the working assembly to the first shroud portion. Working assembly comprises a motor. First shroud portion comprises a motor housing compartment adapted to receive the motor, and wherein at least one securing member comprises a motor mounting member movable to secure the motor in the motor housing compartment. Body for use with said surgical instrument, the surgical instrument including a shaft distally extending from the body and an end effector extending distally from the shaft. Body comprises a detachable working assembly, a first shroud portion, a second shroud portion and at least one securing member. Detachable working assembly comprises a guide. First shroud portion is arranged to accommodate the detachable working assembly. Second shroud portion is removably attached to the first shroud portion to enable detachment of the detachable working assembly from the first shroud portion. At least one securing member is engaged with the first shroud portion before the detachable working assembly is connected to the first shroud portion and is movable along the guide. At least one securing member is movable to attach the detachable working assembly to the first shroud portion. Working assembly comprises a motor. First shroud portion comprises a motor housing compartment adapted to receive the motor, and wherein at least one securing member comprises a motor mounting member movable to secure the motor in the motor housing compartment.

EFFECT: group of inventions has assembly accuracy.

11 cl, 186 dwg

Description

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various designs, to surgical dissecting and stapling brackets with power supplies and cassettes with brackets used in them that are capable of cutting and stapling tissue with brackets.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Surgical stapling instruments are often used to place staples in soft tissues to reduce or eliminate bleeding from soft tissues, especially when dissecting tissue, for example. Surgical stapling instruments such as, for example, an endoscopic divider, may include an end effector that can move or pivot with respect to the elongated trunk assembly. The end effectors are often made with the possibility of fixing soft tissue between the first and second branches, the first branch often includes a cassette with brackets, made with the possibility of storing and removing staples from it, and the second branch often includes a thrust plate. Such surgical staplers include a clamping system for rotating the thrust plate relative to the cassette with brackets.

Surgical staplers, as described above, can be designed to rotate the stop element of the end effector relative to the cassette with brackets in order to clamp soft tissue between them. Under various circumstances, the abutment plate may be designed to apply a fixing force to the soft tissue to firmly hold the soft tissue between the abutment plate and the cassette with brackets. However, if the surgeon does not satisfy the position of the end effector, the surgeon, as a rule, must activate the release mechanism on the surgical stapling instrument to turn the stop to the open position, and then change the position of the end effector. Further, the brackets, as a rule, are fed from the cassette with brackets using an ejector that passes through the groove in the cassette with brackets, which causes the brackets to deform against the stop element and fasten the layers of soft tissues. As is known to those skilled in the art, for more reliable bonding of tissue layers, staples are often placed in several lines or rows. The end clamp may also include a cutting tool, for example, a knife, that extends between two rows of staples to excise soft tissue after stapling staples of soft tissue.

Such surgical stapling instruments and effectors can be shaped and sized to be inserted into the body cavity through a trocar or other access hole. The end effector is usually associated with an elongated barrel, the size of which allows it to pass through a trocar or hole. An elongated barrel assembly is often functionally connected to a handle that supports control systems and / or triggers designed to control the operation of the end effector. In order to facilitate the proper placement and position of the end effector within the body, many surgical instruments are configured to facilitate the articulation of the end effector relative to the portion of the elongated barrel.

Power-operated surgical instruments are described in US Patent Application Publication No. US 2009/0090763 A1, entitled “SURGICAL STAPER WITH ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY”, Zemlok et al. (hereinafter referred to as Zemlok No. 763), the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Power-operated surgical instruments are also described in US Patent Application Publication No. US 2011/0278344 A1, entitled “SURGICAL POWER TOOL”, Zemlok et al. (hereinafter Zemlok No. 344), currently US Pat. No. 8,201,721, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.

The foregoing description is intended only to illustrate various aspects of the relevant technology in the field of application of the invention at present, and should not be construed as limiting the scope of the claims.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

Features and advantages of the present invention, as well as a method for achieving them, will become more apparent, and the invention itself will become more apparent after reading the following description of embodiments of the invention in combination with the accompanying drawings, moreover:

In FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument using one form of retraction design.

In FIG. 2 is a perspective view of an example of a loading unit that can be used with connection to various surgical instruments described herein.

In FIG. 3 shows a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the portion of the boot block shown in FIG. 2.

In FIG. 4 is a plan view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. one.

In FIG. 5 is a partial side view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 4, with the clutch assembly in the disengaged position.

In FIG. 6 is a top view of an embodiment of a portion of a retracting assembly and a structure of its retracting lever.

In FIG. 7 is a partial exploded view of the components of one shape of the drive unit, portions of which are shown in cross section.

In FIG. 8 is another top view of a portion of a surgical instrument with a locking system of a drive unit in a locked position.

In FIG. 9 is a top view of one shape of a blocking dog assembly.

In FIG. 10 is a side elevational view of the blocking dog assembly shown in FIG. 9.

In FIG. 11 is a bottom view of the blocking dog assembly shown in FIG. 9 and 10.

In FIG. 12 is a front view of an embodiment of a gear housing.

In FIG. 13 is a partial cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of a surgical instrument, portions of which are shown in cross-section and with the drive unit locking system in the locked position.

In FIG. 14 is another partial cross-sectional side view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 13, wherein the locking system of the drive unit is in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 15 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical instrument with a removed portion of the body for demonstrating a portion of the structure of the locking system of the instrument drive unit.

In FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument of FIG. 15, and its portions are shown in cross section, solid lines show the locking system of the drive unit in the locked position, and dashed lines show the locking system of the drive unit in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 17 is another partial top view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument of FIG. 15 and 16, wherein the solid lines show the position of the retract lever before activation, and the dotted lines show the position of the retract lever after initial activation.

In FIG. 18 is another partial top view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument of FIG. 15-17, with the dashed lines showing the retraction lever in the fully activated position.

In FIG. 19 is a partial top view of a portion of another embodiment of a surgical instrument, in which a portion of the body is omitted to demonstrate a locking system of a tool drive unit, and wherein the retract lever in the idle position is shown in solid lines, and the retract lever after the initial activation is shown in broken lines.

In FIG. 20 is a partial top view of another embodiment of a surgical instrument, the body portion being omitted to demonstrate its locking system of the drive unit in the locked position.

In FIG. 21 is another partial top view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument of FIG. 20, wherein the locking system of the drive unit is in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 22 is a partial cross-sectional side view of a portion of a surgical instrument and an end effector, with its retracting assembly in an inactive position.

In FIG. 23 is another partial cross-sectional side view of the surgical instrument and end effector shown in FIG. 22, after starting up the launch rod assembly.

In FIG. 24 is another partial cross-sectional side view of the surgical instrument and end effector shown in FIG. 23, after activating the retracting unit to retract the drive rod back to its original position inside the end effector.

In FIG. 25 is a partial cross-sectional side view of a portion of another surgical instrument and end effector in a pre-launch state, with its retracting assembly in an inactive position.

In FIG. 26 is another partial cross-sectional side view of the surgical instrument and end effector shown in FIG. 25, after starting.

In FIG. 27 is another partial cross-sectional side view of the surgical instrument and end effector shown in FIG. 26, wherein the latch of its retracting assembly is in an unlocked position.

In FIG. 28 is another partial cross-sectional side view of the surgical instrument and end effector shown in FIG. 27, wherein the distal portion of the launch rod is in the retracted position.

In FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surgical instrument, with its drive connector assembly in a pivoting position.

In FIG. 30 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of an embodiment of the surgical instrument of FIG. 29, wherein its drive connector assembly is in a start position.

In FIG. 31 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a surgical instrument drive connector assembly shown in FIG. 29 and 30, wherein the solid lines show the selector connector element in the articulated position, and the dashed lines show the selector connector element in the start position.

In FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 33 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32.

In FIG. 34 is another enlarged partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32 and 33, and its travel stop is in the most distal position.

In FIG. 35 is another enlarged partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32-34, and its limiter is in the most proximal position.

In FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 33, along line 36-36 shown in FIG. 33.

In FIG. 37 is a partial perspective view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32-36.

In FIG. 38 is a partial perspective view of the barrel of a surgical instrument, cuff, and single-use loading unit not attached to the barrel, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 39 is a partial perspective view of the barrel, cuff, and disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit attached to a barrel.

In FIG. 40 is a partial perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the barrel, cuff, and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 41 shows another partial perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the barrel, cuff and disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 42 is a perspective view of a distal attachment portion of the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 43 is a different perspective view of the distal portion of the fastening of the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 44 is a perspective view of a proximal trunk attachment portion shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 45 is a different perspective view of a proximal trunk attachment portion shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 46 is a perspective view of a cuff and a trigger shaft of a surgical instrument shown in FIG. 38.

In FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit attached to a barrel.

In FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional elevational view of the disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit not attached to the barrel.

In FIG. 49 is a partial cross-sectional elevational view of the disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit attached to a barrel.

In FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38 along a plane indicated in FIG. 48.

In FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit not attached to the barrel, and further shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit not attached to the barrel, and further shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 53 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit included in the barrel, and further shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 54 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit included in the barrel, and further shows a cuff in a second position that is rotated relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 55 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit included in the barrel, and further shows a cuff in a second position that is rotated relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 56 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and further shows a cuff in a second position that is rotated relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 57 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and further shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 58 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a disposable loading unit, cuff, and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and further shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a surgical instrument barrel and a disposable loading unit not attached to the barrel, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 60 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the barrel and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 59, which shows a disposable loading unit partially inserted into the barrel, and further shown a latch in an unlocked position.

In FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the barrel and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 59, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and further shown a latch in the locked position.

In FIG. 62 is a partial vertical cross-sectional view of the barrel and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 59, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and further shown a latch in the locked position.

In FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram of a voltage versus torque curve in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 64 (a) is a schematic representation of high duty cycle pulses transmitted by a pulse width modulation circuit in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 64 (b) is a schematic representation of low duty cycle pulses transmitted by a pulse width modulation circuit in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 65 (a) is a schematic representation of a trigger element controlled by pulses with a high duty cycle of the pulse width modulation scheme depicted in FIG. 64 (a).

In FIG. 65 (b) is a schematic representation of a triggering element controlled by pulses with a low duty cycle of the pulse width modulation scheme depicted in FIG. 64 (b).

In FIG. 66 (a) -66 (c) are schematic diagrams of a pulse width modulation circuit having a primary set of coils and a secondary set of coils, in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

In FIG. 67 is a graph showing speed and torque over a starting stroke, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 68 is a graph showing a segment of a speed limit of a test during a launch stroke, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 69 and 70 are schematic views of a simplified stepper motor in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

In FIG. 71-73 are schematic views of a hybrid stepper motor in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 74 (a) to 74 (c) are schematic views of the hybrid stepper motor shown in FIG. 71-73 showing a change in polarities.

In FIG. 75 is a perspective view of a screen that is a touch screen for use with an endoscope in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 76 is a perspective view of a first information layer for display on a screen shown in FIG. 75, wherein the first information layer includes feedback in the form of a video image of a disposable loading unit (OZB) attached to a surgical instrument visible with an endoscope.

In FIG. 77 is a perspective view of a second information layer for display on the screen shown in FIG. 75, the second information layer including a control panel for receiving an input signal via a touch screen.

In FIG. 78 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76.

In FIG. 79 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, the second information layer including digital data related to the advancement of the scalpel, and a visual representation of the advancement of the scalpel when the scalpel is close to the start of the launch stroke.

In FIG. 80 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, the second information layer including digital data related to the advancement of the scalpel, and a visual representation of the advancement of the scalpel when the scalpel is close to the distal end of the launch stroke.

In FIG. 81 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes a symbolic representation of the scalpel superimposed on the detected position of the scalpel in the BSS shown in the first information layer.

In FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, the second information layer including a graphical representation of the rate of advancement of the scalpel distally during the launch stroke.

In FIG. 83 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes a graphical representation of the clamping force exerted by the OZB branches on the fabric along the length of the OZB branch.

In FIG. 84 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes digital data related to the position of the BSS, and the BSS shown on the first information layer is not in the articulated position.

In FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes digital data related to the position of the BSS and a visual representation of the position of the BSS, and wherein the BSS shown on the first information layer is in the articulated position.

In FIG. 86 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, showing user input for adjusting the articulated rotation of the BSS by means of the touch screen shown in FIG. 75.

In FIG. 87 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, showing a schematic illustration of the BSS control and further showing input from a user to adjust the articulated rotation of the BSS by controlling the circuit using the touch screen shown in FIG. 75.

In FIG. 88 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, showing the BSS in the articulated rotation position on the first information layer in response to user input shown in FIG. 86 and 87.

In FIG. 89 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, showing user input for controlling closure of a jaw movable by means of the touch screen shown in FIG. 75.

In FIG. 90 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, showing an OZB jaw configured to be moved in a pinched position on a first information layer in response to user input, which is shown in FIG. 89.

In FIG. 91 is a perspective view of a controller interface for a second information layer shown in FIG. 77.

In FIG. 92 is a perspective view of a second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer depicted in FIG. 76, the second information layer including the controller interface shown in FIG. 91, and the promotion line.

In FIG. 93 is a schematic view showing a communication system for a feedback controller and endoscope, surgical instrument, and screen shown in FIG. 75.

In FIG. 94 is an exploded view of components of a surgical instrument system, including a handle and an end effector, including a plurality of indicators in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 95 is a partial perspective view of the handle of a surgical instrument system, including a plurality of indicators in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 96 is a partial cross-sectional view of a handle of a surgical instrument system, including a trigger fuse in accordance with at least one embodiment, the trigger fuse being shown in an unlocked state.

In FIG. 97 is a partial cross-sectional view of the handle depicted in FIG. 96, showing the trigger fuse in the locked state.

In FIG. 98 is a cross-sectional view of a trigger fuse shown in FIG. 96, showing a trigger fuse in its unlocked state.

In FIG. 99 is a cross-sectional view of the trigger fuse of FIG. 96, showing a trigger fuse in its locked state.

In FIG. 99A is a flowchart describing a surgical instrument controller operating program for evaluating whether a surgical instrument has been exposed to a temperature above its threshold temperature and determining how to notify a surgical instrument user of a temperature threshold exceeding.

In FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view of a handle of a surgical instrument system, including a trigger lock in a locked state, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 101 is a detailed cross-sectional view of the handle depicted in FIG. 100, showing the trigger fuse in its locked state.

In FIG. 102 is another detailed cross-sectional view of the handle depicted in FIG. 100 showing a trigger fuse in an unlocked state.

In FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the fuse of the trigger shown in FIG. 100, which is shown in its locked state.

In FIG. 104 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a handle of a surgical instrument, including a trigger lock in a locked state, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 105 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the handle of FIG. 104, which is shown in an unlocked state.

In FIG. 106 is a partial left side view in cross section of the handle depicted in FIG. 104, which is shown in its locked state.

In FIG. 107 is a partial right side elevational cross-sectional view of the handle of FIG. 104, which is shown in its locked state.

In FIG. 108 is a partial left side view in cross section of the handle depicted in FIG. 104, which is shown in its unlocked state.

In FIG. 109 is a partial right side view in cross-section of the handle depicted in FIG. 104, which is shown in its unlocked state.

In FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing steps that a surgical instrument controller can use to process a signal received from an end effector attached to a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 110A is a schematic representation of an array of parameters that can be transmitted from an end effector to a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 111 is a process diagram showing the steps for using the end effector and surgical instrument shown in FIG. 110.

In FIG. 112 is a schematic illustration of a mutual connection between an end effector and a surgical instrument barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 113 is a perspective view of a mutual connection circuit board shown in FIG. 112.

In FIG. 114 is a partial perspective view of an end effector of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 115 is a partial perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 114, and the trunk of a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view of an end effector shown in FIG. 114, attached to the barrel shown in FIG. 115.

In FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view of a mutual connection between an end effector and a barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view of a mutual connection between an end effector and a barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of a mutual connection between an end effector and a barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 120 is a detailed view of the interconnection shown in FIG. 119.

In FIG. 121 is a side view of an end effector comprising a stop and a stop position indicator in accordance with at least one embodiment in which the stop is shown in an open position.

In FIG. 122 is a side view of the end effector shown in FIG. 121, wherein the emphasis is shown in a partially closed position.

In FIG. 123 is another side view of the end effector shown in FIG. 121, wherein the emphasis is shown in a partially closed position.

In FIG. 124 is another side view of the end effector shown in FIG. 121, wherein the emphasis is shown in a partially closed position.

In FIG. 125 is a detailed view of the stop position indicator shown in FIG. 121, in which the emphasis is shown in the position shown in FIG. 121.

In FIG. 126 is a detailed view of the stop position indicator shown in FIG. 121, in which the emphasis is shown in the position shown in FIG. 122.

In FIG. 127 is a detailed view of the stop position indicator shown in FIG. 121, in which the emphasis is shown in the position shown in FIG. 123.

In FIG. 128 is a detailed view of the stop position indicator shown in FIG. 121, in which the emphasis is shown in the position shown in FIG. 124.

In FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional side view of a surgical instrument in accordance with some embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 130 shows a power supply system for supplying power to a surgical instrument of FIG. 129, wherein the power supply system is in connection with a control system of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 129.

In FIG. 131 shows the battery of the power system shown in FIG. 130 connected to the base of the charger.

In FIG. 132 shows a power management diagram of a power system shown in FIG. 130.

In FIG. 133 is a schematic block diagram showing operation parameters of the power system shown in FIG. 130.

In FIG. 134 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument power supply in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a power source shown in FIG. 134, disassembled in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram of a power source circuit shown in FIG. 134, including an intact tearable portion in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 137 is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 136, with a gap in the area to be torn in accordance with the various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 138 is a block diagram of a system for protecting data stored in memory from unauthorized access in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 139 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument power supply, including a data access portal with a lid.

In FIG. 140 shows a data access portal depicted in FIG. 139, in an unclosed configuration.

In FIG. 141 is a perspective view of a power source of a surgical instrument, including an internal data access portal.

In FIG. 142 is a block diagram of a system for protecting data stored in memory from unauthorized access in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 143 is a perspective view of a power source of a surgical instrument in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the power source shown in FIG. 143 associated with a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 145 shows the LEDs of the power source shown in FIG. 143, in various configurations in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 146 is a side view of a surgical instrument, including a housing, in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 147 is a side view of the housing shown in FIG. 146, the outer shell being removed to demonstrate detachable components attached to the housing by means of fasteners.

In FIG. 148 is a side view of the housing shown in FIG. 147, wherein the detachable components are removed from the housing.

In FIG. 149 is a schematic representation of detectable indentations, cutouts, or indentations of a barcode formed on the surface of an end effector.

In FIG. 150 is a schematic illustration of an example barcode used with a barcode reader.

In FIG. 151 is a partial side view of an end effector barrel, including a barcode, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 152 is a partial elevational view of an end effector of a surgical instrument, including a bar code, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 153 is a partial perspective view of the handle of a surgical instrument, including a barcode reader, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the barcode reader shown in FIG. 153, with an end effector located thereon.

In FIG. 155 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the end effector and the barrel of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 156 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the end effector and the barrel of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment, the end effector containing portions of the trigger element that are locked together with the possibility of release.

In FIG. 157 is a partial perspective view of portions of the starting element shown in FIG. 156 locked together with a locking member.

In FIG. 158 is a partial perspective view of portions of the trigger element and the locking element shown in FIG. 156, the portion of the trigger element being removed to show a locking element that locks together the portions of the trigger element with the possibility of release.

In FIG. 159 is an exploded view of the components of the starting element shown in FIG. 156, and an actuator release mechanism configured to move the locking element into an unlocked state and release portions of the trigger element.

In FIG. 160 is a partial exploded view of the components of the interconnection between the release actuator shown in FIG. 159, and a corresponding barrel release actuator.

In FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the interconnection shown in FIG. 160.

In FIG. 162 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of an assembly comprising an engine, a drive shaft, and a slip clutch configured to selectively transmit rotation between the engine and the drive shaft.

In FIG. 163 is a sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 162.

In FIG. 164 is a perspective view of a biasing member of the slip clutch shown in FIG. 162.

In FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 162 showing a friction member of a slip clutch in a neutral position.

In FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 162 showing the friction member shown in FIG. 165, in the forward position.

In FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 162 showing the friction member shown in FIG. 165, in the opposite position.

In FIG. 168 is a perspective view of an engine and a gear assembly in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 169 is a perspective view of an engine, a gear assembly, and an audio feedback generator in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 170 is a perspective view of a tooth on a disk of a gear assembly shown in FIG. 169, the disk turning in a clockwise direction, and the tooth engages with the clicker of the sound feedback generator shown in FIG. 169, in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

In FIG. 171 is a perspective view of a tooth on a disk of a gear assembly shown in FIG. 169, the disk being rotated in a counterclockwise direction, and the tooth engages with the clicker of the sound feedback generator shown in FIG. 169, in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

In FIG. 172 is a perspective view of an engine, a gear assembly having a plurality of discs, and an audio feedback generator in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 173 is a graphical representation of the feedback generated near the end of the starting stroke by the sound feedback generator depicted in FIG. 172, in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

In FIG. 174 and 175 are graphical representations of the feedback generated near the limit of the articulated rotation of the loading unit by the sound feedback generator depicted in FIG. 172, in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

In FIG. 176 is a schematic representation of a surgical instrument operation algorithm.

In FIG. 177 is another schematic representation of a surgical instrument operation algorithm.

In FIG. 178 is a schematic representation of a surgical instrument operation algorithm.

In FIG. 179 shows a circuit configured to indicate battery voltage.

In FIG. 180 is a schematic illustration of a flashing signal configured to indicate a charged state of the battery.

In FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram of a diagnostic check using a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 182 is a schematic illustration of a discharged battery and power failure when the battery is charged below the minimum charge level.

In FIG. 183 is a table of information that can be stored in which operational and / or battery performance is recorded.

In FIG. 184 is a schematic diagram of a battery diagnostic circuit.

In FIG. 185 is a perspective view of a sealed motor and gear assembly for use with a surgical instrument in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 186 is a perspective view in cross section with a spatial separation of the components of the sealed engine and the gear assembly shown in FIG. 185, in accordance with various embodiments of the present description.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The applicant of this application also owns the following patent applications filed on the same day, each of which is fully incorporated into this document by reference:

- US Patent Application entitled “DEVICES FOR RETRIEVING A STARTING ELEMENT FOR SURGICAL POWER SUPPLIES”, Patent Attorney File No. END7293USNP / 130016;

- US Patent Application entitled “DESIGNS OF AUXILIARY BATTERIES FOR SURGICAL POWER SUPPLIES”, Patent Attorney Dossier No. END7294USNP / 130017;

- US patent application entitled “DESIGNS FOR DETECTING ERRORS FOR NODES OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, dossier of patent attorney No. END7295USNP / 130018;

- US Patent Application entitled “FASTENING SITES FOR SURGEON INSTRUMENTS”, Patent Attorney File No. END7296USNP / 130019;

- US patent application entitled “CHAIN FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNAUTHORIZED USE OF BATTERY OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, dossier of patent attorney No. END7297USNP / 130020;

- US Patent Application entitled “CLOSURE INDICATOR SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, Patent Attorney Dossier No. END7298USNP / 130021;

- US Patent Application entitled “TORQUE OPTIMIZATION FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, Patent Attorney File No. END7299USNP / 130022;

- US Patent Application entitled “CONDUCTOR DESIGNS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH POWER SUPPLIES AND ROTATING END EFFECTORS”, dossier of patent attorney No. END7301USNP / 130024;

- US patent application entitled “END EFFECTOR DETECTION SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, Patent Attorney File No. END7302USNP / 130025;

- US patent application entitled “STRUCTURE LOCKING STRUCTURES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, Patent Attorney File No. END7303USNP / 130026;

- US Patent Application entitled “INTERACTIVE SCREENS”, Patent Attorney Dossier No. END7304USNP / 130027; and

- US Patent Application entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ELECTRIC DRIVE COMPLETED WITH THE POSSIBILITY OF HINGE TURN", file of patent attorney No. END7305USNP / 130028.

To provide a complete understanding of the principles of operation, design, operation, production and use of the devices and methods described herein, some embodiments are described. One or more examples of these embodiments are shown in the accompanying drawings. It will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that the devices and methods specifically described herein and illustrated in the accompanying drawings are non-limiting embodiments and that the scope of various embodiments of the present invention is defined solely by the claims. Features shown or described in connection with one embodiment may be combined with features of other embodiments. It is intended that the scope of the present invention include such modifications and variations.

The terms “contain” (and any of its forms, such as “contains” and “containing”), “have” (and any of its forms, such as “has” and “having”), “include” (and any of its forms, such as “includes” and “including”), “enclose” (and any of its forms, such as “encloses” and “enclosing”) are unlimited connecting verbs. As a result, a surgical system or device that "contains," "has," "includes," or "accommodates" one or more elements has this one or more elements, but possession is not limited to only one or more elements. Similarly, an element of a system or device that “contains”, “has”, “includes” or “accommodates” one or more elements has this one or more elements, but possession is not limited to only one or more elements.

The terms "proximal" and "distal" in this document are defined with respect to the physician managing the handle of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the part lying closer to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the part removed from the doctor. It is also proposed to use spatial terms such as “vertical”, “horizontal”, “up” and “down” in relation to the drawings for convenience and clarity. However, since the use of surgical instruments involves many orientations and provisions, these terms should not be interpreted as limiting and (or) absolute.

In laparoscopic manipulations and surgical operations with minimal intervention, various typical devices and methods are used. However, specialists in this field will be able to appreciate the various methods and devices described in this document, which can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications, including, for example, those associated with open surgical procedures. From the present detailed description, it will be further understood by those skilled in the art that the various tools described herein can be inserted into the body in any way, for example, through a natural opening, through an incision or puncture formed in the tissue, etc. Work areas or portions of the end instrument effector can be inserted directly into the body or can be inserted through an access device that has a working channel through which the end effector and the elongated shaft of the surgical instrument can be extended.

In FIG. 1 shows a surgical instrument 10 with power, which in many respects can be similar to those surgical instruments (including their various elements, components and subcomponents), which are described, for example, in the publication Zemlok '763 and / or Zemlok' 344, each of which is fully included in this document by reference. Surgical instrument 10 depicted in FIG. 1 includes a housing 12 that has a handle portion 14 to facilitate manual manipulation of the tool and its operation. Thus, the term “housing” as used herein may encompass a manual or other structure that is capable of manual control. However, the term “housing” may also encompass portions of an automated system of a surgical instrument, such as a robotic system, which is not intended for manual use, but is otherwise controlled and configured to be actuated using various components, sections, and / or actuators of the system.

The node 16 of the elongated trunk in the form of an endoscopic section protrudes from the housing 12 and is configured to functionally attach a surgical end effector designed to perform at least one surgical intervention in response to the application of starting movements to it. Such surgical end effectors may be, for example, endoscopic cutting tools, clamps, or other devices that may include a pair of jaws, one jaw configured to selectively move relative to the other jaw, or in some other configurations both jaws made to move relative to each other. As an additional example, the surgical end effector may be a device configured to cut and staple tissue with brackets, such as a “loading block” 20, as shown in FIG. 2 and 3. Surgical end effectors, such as, for example, loading block 20, can be releasably attached to the node 16 of the elongated barrel of the powered surgical instrument 10, as described in more detail herein.

In FIG. 2 and 3 show one example of a shape of a loading block 20 that can be used with a surgical instrument 10. Such a loading block 20 may be similar to the loading blocks described in the aforementioned US patent application publications, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, and also the loading blocks described, for example, in the publication of US patent application No. US 2012-0298719-A1, entitled "SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATING STRUCTURES FOR PLACING BRACKETS", the full description of which includes This document is incorporated by reference.

As shown in FIG. 2, the loading unit 20 includes a stop assembly 22, which is rotatably supported relative to the carrier 24, functionally securing the cartridge 26 thereto with brackets. The assembly 28 is rotatably coupled to the cassette carrier 24 to form a hinge 27, which allows the carrier 24 to rotate about an articulated rotation axis AA-AA located transversely to the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool. As shown in FIG. 3, the assembly 28 may include, for example, upper and lower mounting sections 30 and 32. Each mounting section 30, 32 may include a threaded hole 34 on each side thereof, having respective dimensions for receiving threaded bolts (not shown) to secure the proximal end of the carrier 24 thereon. A pair of rotary elements 36 located in the center can extend between the upper and lower mounting sections by means of a pair of connecting elements 38 that engage with the distal end of the housing portion 40. Each of the connecting elements 38 may include a blocking proximal portion 39, which is adapted to receive into the grooves 42 formed at the proximal end of the housing portion 40 to hold the assembly 30 and the housing portion 40 in a longitudinally fixed position.

As further shown in FIG. 3, the housing portion 40 of the loading unit 20 may include an upper housing half 44 and a lower housing half 46, each of which is adapted to be received inside the outer casing 50. The proximal end of the housing half 44 may include engagement protrusions 48 to to engage with the possibility of release with the distal end of the node 16 of the elongated barrel. The protrusions 48 may, for example, form a bayonet-type connection with the distal end of the elongated trunk assembly 16. Various binding structures are described in more detail herein. The body halves 44, 46 can form a channel 47 for receiving with the possibility of sliding the drive rod 60, made with the possibility of movement in the axial direction. The second hinge joint 70 may be sized for placement with the possibility of sliding inside the groove 72 formed between the halves 44, 46 of the housing. A pair of anti-protrusion plates 74 may be adjacent to the distal end of the housing portion 40, adjacent to the distal end of the axial drive rod 60 to prevent the drive rod 60 from protruding outwardly during articulation of the carrier 24.

The drive rod 60 may include a distal working head 62 and a proximal engagement portion 64. The drive rod 60 may be constructed from a single sheet of material, or preferably from a plurality of stacked sheets. The engagement portion 64 may include a pair of engagement fingers sized and configured to assemble to engage with a pair of respective retaining grooves formed in the actuating member 66. The actuating member 66 may include a proximal opening 67 that is configured to receive the distal end of the trigger rod when engaging the proximal end of the loading block 20 with the node of the elongated barrel of the surgical instrument 10. The distal working head 62 may have a cut formed on it the tissue-holding portion 63. The distal working head 62 may further include a pair of pins 65 adapted to engage with the stop assembly 22 to rotate it to the closed position to clamp the fabric between the stop 22 and the cassette 26 with brackets while driving the distal working the heads 62 move distally through the cartridge 26 with brackets. The tissue-cutting section 63 on the distal working head 62 serves to cut the clamped tissue when bringing in a known manner surgical brackets (not shown) fixed in the cassette 26 with brackets into forming contact with the stop 22. For example, the distal working head 62 is adapted to gearing in the axial direction and sliding rails (not shown) fixed with the possibility of movement in the cassette 26 with brackets. When driving the slide in the distal direction with the drive element 66, the slide contacts the pushers (not shown) that are connected to the brackets and act on the pushers so that they push the brackets outside the cassette 26 into the forming engagement with the stop 22 on the loading block 20 .

As shown in FIG. 1, the surgical instrument 10 includes an engine 100 that is configured to generate rotational triggers that can be used, for example, to apply triggers to the loading block 20, as will be described in more detail below. For example, in at least one form, the engine 100 is configured to apply rotational triggering movements to the trigger element assembly, generally referred to as element 82. For example, in one design, the trigger assembly 82 includes a drive tube 102 rotatably mounted inside the housing 12 and having an internal thread formed therein (not shown). The proximal threaded portion of the starter rod 104 is threadedly engaged with the drive tube 102 so that the rotation of the drive tube 102 causes axial movement of the starter rod 104. The starter rod 104 can be threadedly engaged with the inside of the actuator rod 60 in the loading block 20. As described in more detail in the aforementioned Zemlok '763 and Zemlok' 344 publications incorporated herein, turning the drive tube 102 in a first direction (e.g., counterclockwise) forces the trigger rod 104 extend the drive element 60 in the distal direction. The initial extension of the drive element 60 in the distal direction inside the boot block 20 leads to the rotation of the stop 22 to the cartridge 26 with brackets. The stop 22 is activated by pins 65 on the drive element 60, which serve to bring the stop 22 to the closed position when the drive element 60 is initially moved in the distal direction DD. An additional distal translational translation of the launch rod 104 and, ultimately, the drive element 60 through the loading block 20 causes the brackets to form into contact with the forming bracket the lower surface of the stop 22.

As further shown in FIG. 1, a surgical instrument 10 may include a swivel system substantially designated as element 109. However, a surgical instrument 10 may include various other designs of a swivel system, described in detail herein. In at least one form, the swivel system 109 may include a swivel mechanism 110 that includes a swivel motor 112 and a handle 114 for manually controlling the swivel. The swivel motor 112 can be activated by the power swivel switch 116 or by turning the knob 114 to manually control the swivel. The activation of the swivel motor 112 serves to rotate the swivel gear 118 of the swivel of the swivel mechanism 110. Activation of the swivel mechanism 110 may cause the end effector (for example, the cassette / stop portion of the loading unit 20) to move from its first position, in which its axis is substantially aligned with the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool, extended barrel assembly 16, to a position in wherein the axis of the end effector is located at an angle to the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool, the elongated barrel assembly, for example, about the axis AA-AA of the swivel joint. Further descriptions of various aspects of the swivel mechanism 110 can be found in Zemlok No. 763, which has been incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In addition, US Pat. No. 7,431,188, entitled “SURGICAL SEWING MACHINE WITH HINGED POWER SUPPLY”, the full description of which is incorporated herein by reference, describes electric end effectors made with the possibility of articulating with the surgeon, which can be used in a surgical connection, which can be used in a surgical connection tool 10.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument may include at least one motor that can apply starting movements to the loading unit 20 and / or swivel movements to the swivel system 109, as described in more detail in other sections of this document. The engine 100 may, for example, be provided with power from a power source 200 of the type described in more detail in Zemlok publication No. 763. For example, the power supply 200 may comprise a rechargeable battery (for example, lead-based, nickel-based, lithium-ion-based, etc.). It is also contemplated that the power supply 200 may include at least one disposable battery. The voltage of a disposable battery may, for example, range from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. However, other power sources may be used. In FIG. 1 shows one example in which the power supply 200 includes a plurality of battery cells 202. The number of battery cells 202 used may depend on the current requirements of the tool 10.

In some embodiments, the surgical instrument 10 may include an auxiliary power source for supplying power to at least one motor of the surgical instrument 10. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the surgical instrument 10 may include a power supply system 2000, which may be configured to provide energy for the operation of the surgical instrument 10. A power supply system 2000, as shown in FIG. 129 can be placed, for example, in a portion 14 of the handle of the housing 12, and it can include a main power source 2002 and an auxiliary or standby power source 2004. The main power source 2002 may be configured to provide energy for the operation of the surgical instrument 10 during normal operation, and the auxiliary power source 2004 may be configured to provide energy for the operation of the surgical instrument 10, at least with limited power, if the main the power source 2002 to provide energy for the operation of the surgical instrument 10, for example, when the main power source 2002 is depleted and / or disconnected from a surgical instrument 10. For example, the auxiliary power source 2002 may be configured to provide energy to restore the surgical instrument 10 to its default state in the event of depletion and / or disconnection of the main power source 2002 from the surgical instrument 10 during surgery.

As shown in FIG. 1 and described in more detail in other sections of this document, a power source, such as, for example, a power source 200, may supply power for the operation of the surgical instrument 10. For example, a power source 200 may supply power to a motor, such as, for example, a motor 100 in order to cause the drive tube 102 to rotate in a first direction and, ultimately, to axially extend the trigger rod 104, which drives the drive rod 60 distally through the loading block 20. Alternati but the power supply 200 may supply power to the engine 100 to cause the drive tube 102 to rotate in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and ultimately axially retract the trigger rod 104, which can move the drive rod 60 proximally to its original position and / or to the default position. Similarly, the main power source 2002 may be configured to supply power to the engine 100 to extend and / or retract the trigger rod 104 during the normal operation of the surgical instrument 10. In addition, the auxiliary power source 2004 may be configured to supply the power required to retract the starter rod 104 to the default position if the main power source 2002 is unable to provide the necessary power, for example, during depletion and / or union main power source 2002 of the surgical instrument 10.

In addition to the foregoing, as described in more detail in other sections of this document, the surgical instrument 10 may be configured to record and store a variety of information regarding the operation of the surgical instrument 10 during surgery, such as, for example, the swivel angle of the end effector 20 ( see FIG. 2), activation status of the end effector 20, sensor readings, number of starts, fabric thickness and / or position of the start rod 104. In some examples, such information A nation can be registered and stored in a volatile or temporary memory, such as, for example, a random access memory (RAM) unit, and power supply may be required to maintain and store information in it. During normal operation of the surgical instrument 10, a primary power source 2002, similar to other power sources described in more detail in other sections of this document, may supply the necessary power to maintain and store information within the volatile or temporary memory blocks of the surgical instrument 10. In addition, an auxiliary the power source 2004 may supply the power necessary to temporarily maintain the stored information, if hydrochloric power source 2002 can not feed the necessary power, such as low and / or disconnecting the main power source 2002 of the surgical instrument 10.

In some aspects, surgical instrument 10 may include a control system 2005 of this type and design as described in Zemlok No. 763, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Further details can be found in this publication regarding the design and operation of such a 2005 control system. For example, the control system 2005 may be configured to generate or provide information to the user, such as a warning or instrument status information, through a user interface, such as a visual or audio display. The signals or input signals generated by the control system 2005 may, for example, be generated in response to other signals or input signals provided by the user, the components of the instrument, or they may depend on one or more measurements associated with the instrument 10. During normal surgical operation tool 10, as described in more detail in other sections of this document, the power source, such as, for example, the main power source 2002 (see FIG. 129), can supply the necessary power for the system will perform its 2005 management functions, including interaction with the user via a user interface. In addition, the auxiliary power supply 2004 can supply power, at least with limited power, necessary for temporary interaction with the user through the user interface, in the event that the main power source 2002 can not supply the necessary power, for example, during depletion and / or disconnecting the main power source 2002 from the surgical instrument 10.

As shown in FIG. 130, the power supply system 2000 may comprise a power control circuit 2006, which may be connected to a main power supply 2002 and an auxiliary power supply 2004. Power management circuitry 2006 may include or may be selectively coupled to a semiconductor element, a computer chip, or memory. The power management circuit 2006 may be configured to send analog or digital input signals or signals to various components of the surgical instrument 10, including, but not limited to, a control system 2005, a main power source 2002 and / or an auxiliary 2004 power source, or to receive signals from them . In various aspects, software may be used in the power management circuit 2006 in which one or more algorithms are used to further formulate input signals for controlling and tracking various components of the surgical instrument 10, including primary power source 2002 and / or auxiliary source 2004 power supply. Such formula-expressed input signals may depend on criteria measured and / or calculated by the power management circuit 2006 or in some cases provided to the power management circuit 2006 by another tool component, user, or a separate system that is in functional communication with the power management circuit 2006.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main power source 2002 may comprise one or more battery cells depending on the current requirements of the tool 10. In various aspects, as shown in FIG. 129, the main power source 2002 may include a battery 2008, which may include a plurality of battery cells 2010, which, for example, may be connected to each other in series. Battery 2008 may be replaceable. In other words, the battery 2008 can be disconnected and removed from the surgical instrument 10 and replaced with another similar battery. In some aspects, the main power source 2002 may comprise a rechargeable battery (e.g., lead-based, nickel-based, lithium-ion-based, etc.). The battery cells 2008 may be, for example, 3-volt lithium battery cells, such as battery cells CR 123A, although other types of battery cells, such as, for example, battery cells with different voltage levels and / or different chemicals. The user can disconnect and remove the depleted or used battery 2008 from the surgical instrument 10 and connect the charged battery 2008 to power the surgical instrument 10. The depleted battery 2008 can subsequently be recharged and reused. It is also contemplated that the primary power source 2002 may include at least one disposable battery. In various aspects, the voltage of a disposable battery may, for example, range from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. The user can disconnect and remove the depleted disposable battery 2008 and connect the new disposable battery 2008 to power the surgical instrument 10.

As described above, the battery 2008 may include rechargeable battery cells and can be removably housed, for example, inside the handle portion 14 of the housing 12. In such circumstances, the battery 2008 can be charged using the base of the charger. For example, as shown in FIG. 131, the charger base 2012 can be connected to the battery 2008 by removing the battery 2008 from its location in the handle portion 14 and connecting it to the charger base 2012. As shown in FIG. 131, the charger base 2012 may comprise a power supply 2014 for charging the battery 2008. The power supply 2014 of the charger base 2012 may be, for example, a battery (or a series of series-connected batteries) or a rectifier that converts alternating current, for example, from a mains power supply, direct current, or any other suitable power source for charging the 2008 battery. The base 2012 of the charger may also include indicator devices Islands such as LEDs, LCD screen, and so on. n., to show the battery is charging 2008.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 131, charger base 2012 may comprise, for example, one or more processors 2016, one or more memory units 2018, and input / output interfaces 2020, 2022. Through the first I / O interface 2020, the base 2012 of the charger can be connected to the power unit 2008 (via the I / O interface of the power unit) to allow, for example, loading data stored in the memory of the power unit 2008 into the memory 2020 of the base 2012 of the charger . In various circumstances, the downloaded data can then be downloaded to another computer device via a second input / output interface 2022 for evaluation and analysis, for example, in a hospital system in which the operation is performed using tool 10, in the surgeon’s office, instrument distributor, instrument manufacturer, etc. . P.

The charger base 2012 may also include a charge meter 2024 for measuring the charge of the battery cells of the battery 2008. The charge meter 2024 can communicate with the processor 2016 so that the processor 2016 can determine in real time the suitability of the battery 2008 for use with the expected battery performance .

As shown in FIG. 129, the auxiliary power supply 2004 may comprise one or more battery cells 2026 that may be located, for example, within the handle portion 14. The battery cell 2026 may be rechargeable (e.g., lead-based, nickel-based, lithium-ion-based, etc.). For example, the battery cell 2026 may be a 3-volt lithium battery cell, such as a battery cell CR 123A. In addition, the battery member 2026 may be configured to be recharged without removal from the tool 10. For example, the main power source 2002 can be used to charge the battery member 2026 when the main power source 2002 is connected to the tool 10.

In FIG. 132 shows an example embodiment of a power management circuit 2006. Among other things, the power management circuit 2006 may be configured to monitor electrical parameters associated with the operation of the main power source 2002 and / or the auxiliary power source 2004. For example, the power management circuit 2006 may be configured to monitor power levels in a primary power source 2002 and / or an auxiliary power source 2004. A power management circuit 2006 as shown in FIG. 132 may include a charge meter 2028, which may be configured to measure a charge of a main power source 2002 and / or an auxiliary power source 2004. The power management circuit 2006 may also comprise a non-volatile memory 2030, such as, for example, flash memory or ROM, and one or more processors 2032. The processor 2032 may be coupled to and may control the memory 2030. In addition, processor 2032 may be coupled to charge meter 2028 to read readings and otherwise control charge meter 2028. In addition, the processor 2032 can control the output devices of the power management circuit 2006, such as, for example, LEDs.

It will become clear to the reader that charge meters 2024 and / or 2028 can be configured to measure voltage, charge, resistance, and / or current strength. In some examples, charge meters 2024 and / or 2028 may include a battery capacity measurement circuit that can be configured to measure a voltage state at a given charge.

In addition to the above, the processor 2032 may store information about the primary power source 2002 and / or the auxiliary power source 2004 in a memory 2030. The information may include, but is not limited to, the available full charge, number of uses, and / or performance. Additionally, the information stored in the memory 2030 may include the ID values of the main power source 2002, which can be read and stored in the power management circuit 2006. Such IDs can be, for example, radio frequency tags (RFIDs) that are read by power management circuitry 2006 via an RFID transponder 2034. An RFID transponder 2034 can read RFIDs from power supplies that include RFID tags. The ID values may be read, stored in memory 2030, and compared by a processor 2032 with a list of valid ID values stored in memory 2030 or other storage device associated with power management circuit 2006 to determine, for example, whether a removable / removable main power source 2002 associated with the read ID value, authentic and / or appropriate. In such circumstances, if the processor 2032 determines that the removable / removable component associated with the read ID value is not genuine, the power management circuit 2006 may be configured to prevent the use of tool 10, for example, by opening a switch (not shown) that will interrupt the power supply to the tool 10. Various parameters that the processor 2032 can evaluate to determine if the component is genuine and / or suitable include, for example, the code yes s; component model / type, manufacturer information, region information, and / or previous error codes.

In addition to the above, power management circuitry 2006 may also include an input / output interface 2036 for communicating with another device, such as a computer, to allow data stored in memory 2030 to be downloaded to another device for evaluation and analysis, for example, in a hospital system , in which the operation is performed using the tool 10, in the surgeon's office, the distributor of the instrument and / or the manufacturer of the instrument. The I / O interface 2036 may be, for example, a wired or wireless interface.

As shown in the block diagram depicted in FIG. 133, the power management circuit 2006 can selectively transmit power from the main power source 2002 and the auxiliary power source 2004 to the surgical instrument 10. For example, the processor 2032 can be programmed to provide power to the instrument 10 from the main power source 2002 when the main power source 2002 can supply power to the tool 10, and from an auxiliary power source 2004, when the main power source 2002 is not Can supply tool 10 with electricity.

During normal operation of the tool 10, the processor 2032, after detecting and determining the authenticity of the main battery source 2002, as described above, can provide power to the tool 10 from the main power source 2002. The main power source 2002 may continue to power the tool 10 until the main power source 2002 reaches or falls below a predetermined minimum charge, for example, when the main power source 2002 is disconnected and / or depleted. The power management circuit 2006 can be used to determine when the charge of the main power source 2002 reaches or falls below a predetermined minimum charge level. For example, processor 2032 may be configured to use a charge meter 2028 or other similar charge meter to monitor the charge level of the main power source 2002 and detect when the charge level has reached a predetermined minimum level that can be stored in the memory 2030 of the power control circuit 2006, or will fall below him. At this point, the processor 2032 may notify the user of the need to replace the main power source 2002. The power management circuit 2006 may include an indicator, such as one or more LEDs, for example, an LCD screen that is activated to notify the user of the tool 10 of the need to replace the main power source 2002. In addition, the processor 2032 may be configured to switch the power supply of the tool 10 from the main power source 2002 to the auxiliary power source 2004 after detecting that the charge level of the main power source 2002 has reached or falls below a predetermined minimum level. It will become clear to the reader that additional indicators may be used to provide the user with additional feedback. For example, you can use the indicator to notify the user that the tool 10 is switching from the main power source 2002 to the auxiliary power source 2004 and vice versa.

In addition to the above, the processor 2032 may be programmed to charge the auxiliary power source 2004 from the main power source 2002 when the main power source 2002 is connected to the surgical instrument 10. In some examples, after fully charging from the main power source 2002 to a predetermined maximum charge level the auxiliary power supply 2004 may not be used as long as the main power source 2002 can provide tools cop 10 power supply. In addition, the power management circuit 2006 may be used to determine a sufficient charge level of the auxiliary power supply 2004. For example, the processor 2032 may be configured to use a charge meter 2028 to monitor the charge level of the auxiliary power supply 2004 until the charge level reaches a predetermined maximum level that can be stored in the memory 2030 of the power control circuit 2006, at which point the processor 2032 may stop charging the auxiliary power source 2004 from the main power source 2002. The power management circuit 2006 may include an indicator, such as one or more LEDs, an LCD screen, and the like, which can be activated to notify the user of the tool 10 of a sufficient charge level of the auxiliary power supply 2004.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main power source 2002 can be mounted in the housing inside the camera 2038 of the tool handle portion 14 of the chamber 10. To replace the main power source 2002, the outer shell of the handle portion 14 to expose the camera 2038 can be removed. In some examples, the trigger or switch may be coupled to the outer the shell portion of the handle portion 14 so that an attempt to remove the outer shell of the handle portion 14 may be perceived by the processor 2032 as an event of triggering a switch from the main power source 2002 to omogatelny source of power in 2004.

After replacing the primary power source 2002 of the surgical instrument 10 with a new primary power source 2002, the power management circuit 2006 can verify the authenticity of the new primary power source 2002 as described above, and after confirming the authenticity, the power management circuit 2006 can transmit power from the new main power source 2002 to tool 10. In addition, the main power source 2002 can charge the auxiliary power source 2004 Ia, as described above.

Surgical end effectors, such as, for example, loading block 20 (FIGS. 2 and 3), can be functionally connected to the node 16 of the elongated barrel of the surgical instrument 10 with power (FIG. 1). For example, as shown in FIG. 38-58, a surgical end effector, such as, for example, a disposable loading unit (OZB) 5502, may be releasably attached to a surgical instrument, such as, for example, a surgical instrument 10 with power (FIG. 1). In various embodiments, the surgical instrument may include a barrel 5520, which may, for example, interact with the OZB 5502. In various embodiments, a cuff, such as, for example, a rotating cuff 5580, can block the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release relative to the barrel 5520. In addition in various embodiments, the rotation of the cuff 5580 may facilitate attachment and / or alignment of the launch assembly and / or hinge assembly, as described herein.

In various embodiments, the OZB 5502 may include a distal mount portion 5504, and the barrel 5520 may include an outer tube 5554 and a proximal mount portion 5522. The distal attachment portion 5504 of the OZB 5502 can receive the proximal attachment portion 5522 of the barrel 5520 when attaching the OZB 5502 to the trunk 5520 (FIG. 39). In addition, the rotating sleeve 5580 may be located around the proximal mounting portion 5522 of the barrel 5520 so that the distal mounting portion 5504 of the OZB 5502 may also be located inside the rotating sleeve 5580. The rotating sleeve 5580 may be attached to the barrel 5502 and / or to the proximal mounting portion 5504 and in some embodiments, implementation, for example, can be rotatably fixed on the proximal portion 5504 of the barrel mounting. In some embodiments, the proximal section of the barrel mounting and 5520 may receive the distal attachment portion of the OZB 5502 when attaching the OZB 5502 to the barrel 5520. In addition, in some embodiments, the cuff 5580 may be rotatably fixed to the OZB 5502.

In FIG. 38-58, it is shown that when moving the OZB 5502 between the unattached position and the attached position relative to the barrel 5520 of the surgical instrument, the OZB 5502 can progressively move along the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520. The distal portion 5504 of the mounting of the OZB 5502 can be inserted into the proximal section 5522 of the mounting of the barrel 5520 when moving OZB 5502 from an unattached position to an attached position. For example, the OZB 5502 can progressively move in the direction A (FIG. 39) while moving the OZB 5502 between the unattached position and the attached position. In some embodiments, the engagement of the groove-and-groove between the distal attachment portion 5504 and the proximal attachment portion 5522 may guide the OZB 5502 along the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520. As shown primarily in FIG. 42, the distal attachment portion 5504 may include a guide rail 5514. In addition, as primarily shown in FIG. 44, the proximal attachment portion 5522 may include a guide groove 5534. The guide groove 5534 may be sized and designed to receive and guide the guide rail 5514 when inserting the proximal attachment portion 5504 of the OZB 5502 into the distal portion 5522 of the barrel 5520. Guide groove 5534 may be, for example, a longitudinal groove, and the guide rail 5514 may be, for example, a longitudinal rib. In some embodiments, the guide groove 5534 and the guide rail 5514 can prevent twisting and / or rotation of the BSS 5502 relative to the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520.

As shown primarily in FIG. 38, the distal attachment portion 5504 may include a first locating mark 5510, for example, such as a first arrow, and the barrel 5520 and / or cuff 5580 may include a second locating mark 5590, for example, such as a second arrow. The combination of the first and second mounting marks 5510, 5590 can provide a combination of the guide rail 5514 and the guide groove 5534, which can simplify the connection of the distal portion 5504 of the mount with the proximal portion 5522 of the mount. As described herein, the translational movement of the OZB 5502 along a longitudinal path to the barrel 5520 can fix the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release relative to the barrel 5520. In such embodiments, it is not necessary to rotate the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520 to fix the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520. In fact, the rotation of the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520 may be limited and / or prevented from engaging a groove-and-groove between the proximal attachment portion 5522 and the distal attachment portion 5504, as described herein present document. In various embodiments, the cuff 5580 may rotate relative to the OZB 5502 and / or the barrel 5520 to fix the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release on the barrel 5520. For example, as described herein, the cuff 5580 can rotate from its original position (FIG. 53) to the second position (FIG. 54), and then return to the starting position (FIG. 57) to fix the OZB 5502 on the barrel 5520.

As shown primarily in FIG. 42 and 43, the proximal portion 5504 of the OZB element 5502 may include a rotary key or rib 5506. When moving the OZB 5502 in direction A (FIG. 39) between the unattached position (FIG. 38) and the attached position (FIG. 39), the rotary key 5506 may affect the rotation of the sleeve 5580. For example, the rotary key 5506 may rotate and / or shift the sleeve 5580 in the direction B (FIG. 39) from the initial position to the second position. The distal attachment portion 5504 may be inserted into the proximal attachment portion 5522 if the cuff 5580 is biased to a second position. Moreover, when the distal attachment portion 5504 is fully inserted into the proximal attachment portion 5522, the rotary key 5506 can allow the sleeve 5580 to rotate in the direction C (FIG. 39) from the second position to its original position. Direction C may, for example, be opposite to direction B. As described herein, when the cuff 5580 is returned to its original position, the cuff 5580 may block the distal attachment portion 5504 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5522. As shown in FIG. 42 and 43, the pivot key 5506 may include a pivot bevel 5508 at its proximal end. The swivel bevel 5508 may engage with the barrel member 5520 to, for example, affect the rotation of the rotary cuff 5580.

In various embodiments, the rotation of the bevel 5508 may affect the rotation of the launch barrel 5540 located inside the barrel 5520. For example, as shown primarily in FIG. 47-50, the launch barrel 5540 may include a launch barrel rotator 5544, which may extend radially outward from the launch barrel 5540. The rotary bevel 5508 of the rotary key 5506 may engage with the rotary barrel rotator 5544 when the OZB 5502 is inserted into the barrel 5520. B in various embodiments, the pivot bevel 5508 can rotate the trigger barrel rotator 5544, which can rotate the trigger barrel 5540. For example, trigger barrel 5540 and trigger barrel rotator 5544 can rotate in direction B (FIG. 54) between the first position (FIG. 53) and the second position (FIG. 54). As shown in FIG. 47-50, the launch barrel 5540 may engage with the rotary sleeve 5580. For example, the rotatable sleeve 5580 may include a rotator groove 5584, the configuration and dimensions of which allow the launch rotator 5544 to be received and / or held. The trigger barrel rotator 5544 can be held by the rotator groove 5584 so that the rotation of the barrel rotator 5544 causes the rotation of the rotary sleeve 5580. In such embodiments, the introduction of OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520 can affect the rotation of the rotary sleeve 5580 in the direction B (FIG. 54), for example by turning the barrel rotator 5544 in direction B.

As shown primarily in FIG. 44 and 45, the proximal attachment portion 5522 may include a pivot key groove 5524, which may include the pivot key 5506 when the distal attachment portion 5504 is inserted into the proximal attachment portion 5522. In some embodiments, the pivot key groove 5524 may include a clearance cutout 5526 for receiving a launch barrel rotator 5544. For example, the pivot bevel 5508 at the proximal end of the pivot wrench 5506 can rotate the trigger barrel rotator 5544 to a second position and insert it into the clearance gap 5526 (FIG. 54). The rotary key 5506 can continue to move along the groove of the rotary key when introducing the OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520. Also, as the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506 passes the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel, the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel can rotate back to the first position (FIG. 58), while a corresponding rotation of the rotating cuff 5580 can occur back to its original position.

In various embodiments, the rotatable cuff 5580 may be displaced to its original position relative to the barrel 5520 and / or proximal attachment portion 5522. For example, the spring 5592 can slide the blocking cuff 5580 to its original position. Spring 5592 may include a proximal end 5594, which can be fixed relative to the barrel 5520, and a distal end 5596, which can be fixed relative to the sleeve 5580. For example, the proximal end 5594 of the spring 5592 can be fixed in the proximal groove 5538 of the spring (FIG. 51 ) of the barrel 5520, and the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592, for example, can be fixed in the distal groove of the spring 5588 (FIG. 46) of the rotary cuff 5580. In such embodiments, when the cuff 5580 is rotated, the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592 can be displaced from relative to the proximal end 5594 of the spring 5592, which leads to the formation of torsion force. Accordingly, the cuff 5580 can counteract rotation from the initial position to the second position, and when the cuff is rotated to the second position, the spring 5592 can return the cuff 5580 to its original position. Since the trigger barrel rotator 5544 is engaged with the sleeve 5580, the spring 5592 can also shift the trigger barrel 5540 to its first position.

In various embodiments, the rotating sleeve 5580 may include a locking latch 5582 that locks the OZB 5502 to release on the barrel 5520. As shown primarily in FIG. 46, the interlocking latch 5582 may extend radially inward from the inner perimeter of the rotating sleeve 5580. In various embodiments, the interlocking latch 5582 may extend into the locking groove 5536 (FIG. 44) in the proximal attachment portion 5522. As shown primarily in FIG. 44, retainer groove 5536 may form a cutout in guide groove 5534. In various embodiments, retainer groove 5536 may extend from guide groove 5534 and may, for example, be perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to guide groove 5534. In addition, the locking retainer 5582 may move along the groove 5536 of the retainer when the rotating cuff 5580 is rotated between the initial position and the second position relative to the barrel 5520.

In various embodiments, the locking retainer 5582 may engage with the distal portion 5504 of the attachment of the OZB 5502 to fix the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520. For example, as shown in FIG. 42, the distal attachment portion 5504 may include a guide rail 5514, which may have a blocking cutout 5516 formed thereon. The shape and dimensions of the lockout notch 5516 may receive the lockout retainer 5582 of the rotatable cuff 5580 when the OZB 5502 is fully inserted into the proximal attachment portion 5522. For example, with the complete insertion of the distal attachment portion 5504 into the proximal attachment portion 5522, the blocking notch 5516 of the distal attachment portion 5504 may align with the retaining groove 5536 of the proximal attachment portion 5522. Accordingly, the locking retainer 5582 can move along the locking groove 5536 in the proximal attachment portion 5522 and enter the locking cutout 5516 in the distal attachment portion. Moreover, the locking latch 5582 may shift to engage the locking notch 5516 under the influence of the torsion spring 5592. For example, after the trigger barrel rotator 5544 releases the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506, the trigger barrel 5540 may return to its first position, the rotary sleeve 5580 may return to its original position under the influence of a torsion spring 5592. Moreover, if the cuff 5580 is rotated from the second position, returning to its original position, its locking latch 5582 can combine I engage with the locking notch 5516 in the guide rail 5514.

In various embodiments, the rotation of the cuff 5580 may simplify the connection and / or alignment of the launch site. For example, the trigger shaft 5540 may extend between the proximal end 5546 and the distal end 5542. The proximal end 5546 may have a swivel joint that can rotate the trigger barrel 5540 between the first configuration and the second configuration. In addition, the distal end 5542 may have a coupling for connecting the cutting element OZB 5502. Turning the trigger barrel 5540 may facilitate the connection of the cutting element. For example, by rotating the coupler at the distal end 5542 of the launch barrel 5540, the coupler may engage and engage with a cutting element in the OZB 5502. In some embodiments, the coupler may include a bayonet mount that may mesh with a corresponding bayonet socket connector on the cutting element in the OZB 5502. As shown mainly in FIG. 40 and 41, the trigger assembly may further include a sleeve 5550, which includes the trigger barrel 5540, for example, between the proximal end 5546 and the distal end 5542.

In various embodiments, when turning the launch barrel 5540 inside the barrel 5520, the launch barrel 5540 may align with the groove of the launch barrel 5518 in the OZB 5502. For example, the rotator of the launch rod 5544 may align with the groove of the launch barrel 5518 when the OZB 5502 is fully inserted and connected to the barrel 5520. However, in various embodiments, if the OZB 5502 is only partially inserted into the barrel 5520, the rotator of the launch barrel 5544 can be rotated by means of a rotary key 5506, with the exit from the groove 5518 of the launch barrel. In other words, the trigger barrel rotator 5544 can align with the trigger barrel groove 5514 if the trigger barrel 5540 is in the first position, and can be disconnected with the trigger barrel groove 5514 if the trigger barrel 5540 is rotated to the second position. In such embodiments, if the OZB 5502 is only partially inserted into the barrel 5520, and / or before the OZB 5502 is secured to the barrel 5520 so that it can be released using a rotating sleeve 5580, the launch path of the launch barrel rotator 5544 may be blocked by the distal attachment portion 5504. The connection of the launch barrel 5540 and the sleeve 5580 can provide a secure attachment OZB 5502 to the barrel 5520, before the launch barrel 5540 can fire and / or move forward. For example, a surgical instrument cannot be triggered until the cutting element in the OZB 5502 is connected to the trigger barrel 5540, and / or, for example, until the trigger barrel 5540 is properly aligned with the barrel 5520.

In certain embodiments, turning the cuff 5580 can simplify the connection and / or alignment of the hinge assembly 5559. As shown primarily in FIG. 40 and 41, the hinge assembly 5559 may include a proximal hinge rail 5560, a distal hinge rail 5562 and a hinge connector 5566. In addition, the trunk 5520 may include a groove 5528 of the proximal hinge rail, and the OZB 5502 may include, for example distal hinge rod 5512. In some embodiments, the proximal hinge rod 5560 may align with the groove 5528 of the proximal hinge rod, and the distal hinge rod 5562 may align with the groove 5512 of the distal hinge rod. As shown in FIG. 46, the hinge connector 5566 may be located within the rotary sleeve 5580. For example, the rotatable sleeve 5580 may include a groove of the hinge connector, and the hinge connector 5566 may be movable therein.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 40 and 41, the hinge proximal rod 5560 may have a proximal notch 5572, and the hinge distal rod 5562 may have a distal notch 5574. Moreover, the hinge connector 5566 may include a proximal hinge 5568 and a distal hinge 5572. The 5568 proximal hinge with the possibility of fixing in the proximal cut 5572 of the proximal articulated rod 5560. In some embodiments, the implementation of the distal articulated hook 5570 may functionally engage with the distal cut 5574 of the distal articulated eyki 5562. As described herein, a rotating collar 5580 can be rotated between the initial configuration and the second configuration. When the cuff 5580 is rotated, the articulated connector 5566 located within it can also rotate relative to the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520. In various embodiments, the proximal articulated hook 5568 of the articulated connector 5566 can remain fixed in the proximal cut 5572 of the proximal articulated rod 5560 when the articulated connector 5566 is rotated Moreover, the distal articulated hitch 5570 of the articulated connector 5566 can be engaged with the distal notch 5574 of the distal articulated rod 5562 When rotation of the hinge connector 5566 to the cuff 5580 from the second position to the initial position. For example, when the OZB 5502 is fully inserted into the barrel 5508, the distal cut 5574 of the distal hinge rod 5562 can be combined with the distal hinge hook 5568 of the hinge connector 5566. In such embodiments, if the rotating sleeve 5580 rotates to return to its original configuration, the distal hinge hook 5568 may enter into the distal cut 5574 of the distal hinge rail 5562. For the complete assembly of the hinge assembly 5559, it is necessary that the distal hinge cut 5568 is located in the distal cut 5574.

As shown primarily in FIG. 45, in various embodiments, the proximal articulated groove groove 5528 may include a first lumen 5530 and a second lumen 5532. The proximal and distal articulated hooks 5568, 5570 of the articulated connector 5566 may enter the first and second lumens 5530, 5532, respectively. In some embodiments, the first and second lumens 5530, 5532 may provide space to move the proximal and distal articulated hooks 5568, 5570 when the cuff 5580 is rotated and / or, for example, articulated to rotate the articulated assembly 5559.

As shown in FIG. 51-58, to connect the OZB 5502 with the barrel 5520 of the surgical instrument, the user can combine the alignment mark 5510 of the OZB 5502 with the alignment mark 5590 of the barrel 5520 and / or sleeve 5580 (FIG. 51). While maintaining alignment of the alignment marks 5510, 5590, the user can move the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520 along the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520. The user can move the OZB 5502 along a straight or substantially straight path, and there is no need for various embodiments, for example, to rotate the OZB relative to the barrel 5520. As shown mainly in FIG. 53, the OZB 5502 may continue to translate relative to the barrel 5520, and the guide rail 5514 of the distal mount portion 5504 may enter the guide groove 5534 (FIG. 44) in the proximal mount portion 5522 of the barrel 5520. As the distal mount portion 5504 moves to the proximal portion 5522 The guide groove 5534 can guide the guide rail 5514 and can, for example, maintain alignment of the alignment marks 5510, 5590. In other words, the guide groove 5534 and the guide rail 5514 can prevent the OZB from turning 5502 rel. respect to the longitudinal axis of the barrel 5520. As shown mainly in FIG. 52, the proximal articulated hook 5568 of the articulated connector 5522 may extend into the first clearance 5530 and may enter the proximal notch 5572 of the proximal articulated rod 5562, and the distal articulated catch 5570 of the articulated connector 5522 may, for example, pass through the second clearance 5532.

As shown primarily in FIG. 54, when the distal attachment portion 5504 is inserted into the proximal attachment portion 5522, the bevel of the rotary key of the rotary key 5506 can abut the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel. The skew of the rotary key 5508 can direct and / or determine the direction of movement of the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel into the gap cutout 5526, which is a continuation of the groove 5524 of the rotary key. In addition, as the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel moves to the clearance hole 5526, the launch barrel 5540 can rotate in direction B. The launch barrel 5540 can rotate from the first position to the second position. This rotation of the launch barrel 5540 can simplify the connection of the distal end 5542 of the launch barrel 5540 with the cutting element in the OZB 5502. In addition, the rotation of the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel can lead to the rotation of the sleeve 5580 in the direction B by engagement between the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel and the groove 5584 of the launch rotator the barrel (FIG. 46) in the cuff 5580. The cuff 5580 can be rotated from its original position, for example, in the second position. In addition, the locking retainer 5582 can move along the locking groove 5536 in the barrel 5520 when the sleeve 5580 is rotated. When the sleeve 5580 is rotated, the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592 can also be rotated, since the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592 can be locked in the distal groove 5588 of the spring (FIG. 46 ) in the cuff 5580. The displacement of the distal end 5596 relative to the proximal end 5594 can create a torsional elastic return force, which can lead to the displacement of the cuff 5580, for example, from the second position to its original position, and can, for example measures, shift the launch barrel 5540 from the second position to the first position.

As shown primarily in FIG. 55, when the cuff 5580 is rotated to the second position, the proximal articulated hook 5568 can remain engaged with the proximal notch 5572 in the proximal articulated rod 5560. Moreover, the distal articulated hook 5570 can rotate so that the distal articulated hook 5570 creates a gap for the distal articulated rod626 OZB 5502. As shown in FIG. 56, the OZB 5502 can be fully inserted into the barrel 5520 if the sleeve 5580 and the articulated connector 5566 located therein are rotated to the second position. In various embodiments, the distal hinge rail 5562 may extend the distal hinge 5555 of the hinge 5566 if the hinge 5566 is rotated to a second position. In addition, the distal articulated hook 5570 can be rotatably aligned with the distal notch 5574 in the articulated connector 5566. As shown in FIG. 56, with the full introduction of OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520, the rotator 5544 of the launch barrel can pass the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506.

As shown in FIG. 57, the trigger barrel rotator 5544 can rotate in direction C if the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506 passes the barrel trigger rotator 5544. For example, the trigger barrel rotator 5544 may rotate in direction C from a second position to a first position. In addition, the rotation of the launch barrel rotator 5544 may affect the rotation of the cuff 5580 in the direction C from the second position to the starting position. In various embodiments, the spring 5592 can bias the trigger rod 5540 to its first position and the lip 5580 to its original position. For example, the trigger barrel rotator 5544 may be located in the trigger barrel rotator groove 5584 (FIG. 46) in the sleeve 5580 so that the rotation of the barrel trigger rotator 5544 causes the sleeve 5580 to rotate. Due to the combination of the distal articulated hook 5570 of the articulated connector 5566 and the distal notch 5574 of the distal hinge rail 5562, the hinge 5566 can rotate when the cuff 5580 is rotated, and the distal hinge 5570 can rotate to engage the distal cut 5574. The 5559 hinge assembly can be fully assembled if the true articulated hitch 5570 engages with the distal notch 5574. In addition, by turning the trigger barrel rotator 5544 in the C direction, the distal end 5542 of the launch barrel 5540 can rotate in direction C, which can facilitate the connection of the cutting element in the OZB 5502 with the distal end 5542 of the trigger trunk 5540.

As shown in FIG. 58, rotation of the sleeve 5580 may also cause the locking lock 5582 of the sleeve 5580 to rotate into the blocking cutout 5516 in the guide rail 5514 of the distal attachment portion 5504. For example, when the OZB 5502 is fully inserted into the barrel 5520, the locking cutout 5516 can be aligned with the locking groove 5536 so that the locking catch 5582 can rotate through the locking groove 5536 and enter the locking cutout 5516. As described herein, the spring 5592 can move the cuff 5580 so that it rotates in direction C (FIG. 57) after the launch barrel rotator 5544 passes the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506. As shown in FIG. 58, when the launch barrel rotator 5544 rotates in the C direction, the launch barrel rotator 5544 can align with the launch barrel groove 5518 in the OZB 5502. Aligning the launch barrel rotator 5544 with the launch barrel groove 5518 can provide, for example, distal movement of the launch barrel 5540 to activate the OZB 5502 .

As described herein, the rotating sleeve 5580 can lock the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release relative to the barrel 5520. In addition, the rotation of the sleeve 5580 can provide connection and / or alignment of the hinge assembly 5559, as well as connection and / or alignment, for example, the launch barrel 5540 with a cutting element in the OZB 5502. In addition, turning the cuff can also unlock the connection of the OZB 5502 with the barrel, disconnect the hinge assembly 5559 and / or disconnect the launch barrel 5540 and the cutting element in the OZB 5502. For example, if the sleeve 5580 is rotated again is released from the initial position to the second position, the blocking latch 5582 can be released from the blocking notch 5516 in the distal attachment portion 5504. Accordingly, the distal attachment portion 5504 can be detached from the proximal attachment portion 5522 along the longitudinal axis, which, for example, is determined by the barrel 5520. In various embodiments, the OZB 5502 can be disconnected from the barrel 5520 without turning the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520. However, the cuff 5580 can rotate relative to the barrel 5520, which allows, for example, to disconnect the distal hinge rail 5562 and the hinge connector 5566 in the sleeve 5580 and can disconnect the launch barrel 5540 and the cutting element in the OZB 5502.

As shown in FIG. 59-62, a disposable loading unit (OZB) or end effector 5602 may be releasably coupled to a surgical instrument barrel 5620. In various embodiments, a spring or, for example, a plurality of springs can bias the OZB 5602 in a locked position relative to the barrel 5620. For example, the OZB 5602 can be releasably connected to the barrel 5620 by means of a bayonet mount, and the spring can rotate the OZB 5602 to connect the OZB 5602 to the barrel 5620 in bayonet connection. OZB 5602 may include a distal attachment portion 5604, and the barrel 5620 may, for example, include a proximal attachment portion 5622. The distal attachment portion 5604 of the OZB 5602 may receive the proximal attachment portion 5622 of the barrel 5620 when attaching the OZB 5602 to the barrel 5620. In other embodiments, the proximal attachment portion of the barrel 5620 may receive the distal attachment portion of the OZB 5602 when attaching the OZB 5602 to the barrel 5620.

In various embodiments, the distal attachment portion 5604 of the OZB 5602 may include a retainer 5606 that can extend radially outward from the portion of the distal attachment portion 5604. In addition, the retainer 5606 may include a beveled surface 5608. As described herein, the beveled surface 5608 of the retainer 5606 may engage with a spring, such as, for example, a spring 5636b, and may deform the spring 5636b when the distal mounting portion 5604 is inserted into proximal attachment portion 5622. Moreover, the latch 5606 can be held by the proximal attachment portion 5622 to fix the OZB 5602 with the possibility of release on the barrel 5622. As shown mainly in FIG. 59, the proximal attachment portion 5622 of the barrel 5620 may define the cavity 5624. In various embodiments, the shape and dimensions of the cavity 5624 may allow it to receive the distal portion 5604 of the mounting OZB 5602. In addition, springs 5636a, 5636b may be located inside the cavity 5624. For example, the first spring 5636a may be located on the first side of the cavity 5624, and the second spring 5636b may be located on the second side of the cavity 5624. The springs 5636a, 5636b may be symmetrical or asymmetrical with respect to the cavity 5624. In various embodiments, at least a portion springs 5636a, 5636b may extend into cavity 5624. For example, leg 5637 of second spring 5636b may extend into cavity 5624, and another leg 5637 of second spring 5636 may, for example, be held in the proximal attachment portion 5622.

As shown in FIG. 59, the proximal attachment portion 5622 may also include a locking groove 5638 that may be formed in the cavity 5624 and / or may, for example, be accessible through the cavity 5624. The shape and dimensions of the locking groove 5638 may, for example, allow it to be received, for example , latch 5606. In various embodiments, the locking groove 5638 may hold the latch 5606, which locks the OZB 5602 so that it can be released on the barrel 5620. In addition, in various embodiments, the proximal attachment portion 5622 may include a latch 5630. The latch and 5630 is movable between an unlocked position (FIGS. 59 and 60) and a lock position (FIGS. 61 and 62). In various embodiments, the latch 5630 may be spring loaded, and the spring 5634 may bias the latch 5630 to the locked position. For example, the latch 5630 may include a latch spring 5634 that can bias the latch 5630 toward and / or to the locked position. The lock position may be distal, for example, with respect to the unlocked position. In some embodiments, the latch 5630 may include a thumb grip and / or rib 5632 to facilitate moving the latch 5630 from the locked position to the unlocked position. For example, a user may click on the thumb grip 5632 and apply the latch 5630 proximally to place the latch 5630 in the unlocked position.

In various embodiments, the latch 5630 may functionally lock or at least partially block the locking groove 5638. For example, if the latch 5630 is in the locked position (FIGS. 61 and 62), the tab 5635 of the latch 5630 may extend over at least , a portion of the locking groove 5638. The latch 5630 may cover or partially cover the locking groove 5638 and may impede and / or restrict access to the locking groove 5638. In some embodiments, the latch 5635 of the latch 5630 may prevent movement and / or shifting the latch 5606 into the locking groove 5638. Moreover, if the latch 5630 is in the locked position, the latch 5630 may engage with the spring 5636a, 5636b. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 and 62, the latch 5630 may support the spring 5636b so as to limit and / or prevent deformation of the spring 5636b. Moreover, the latch 5630 can support the spring 5636b so that it is impossible to insert the distal portion 5604 of the OZB 5602 into the cavity 5624. For example, at least the portion of the spring 5636b can block the cavity 5624, which may prevent the distal portion 5604 of the attachment from fully entering the proximal mounting portion 5622. In some embodiments, the proximal attachment portion 5622 may include a plurality of springs that can provide a rotational force to the distal attachment portion 5604 to rotate the distal attachment portion 5604 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622. For example, the proximal attachment portion 5622 may include a pair of springs or more than three springs. In other embodiments, only one spring in the proximal attachment portion 5622 can be used to rotate the distal attachment portion 5604 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622. In addition, or alternatively, in various embodiments, the distal attachment portion 5602 of the OZB 5602 may include at least one spring, which, for example, can rotate the distal attachment portion 5602 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622.

In various embodiments, if the latch 5630 is in the unlocked position (FIGS. 59 and 60), the locking groove 5638 may be unlocked and / or to a lesser extent locked by the tab 5635 of the latch 5630. For example, the latch 5606 may extend beyond the unlocked latch 5630 to to enter the locking groove 5638. Moreover, the latch 5606 can be displaced by the unlocked latch 5630 and enter the locking groove 5638, as described herein. Moreover, in various embodiments, if the latch 5630 is in the unlocked position, the latch 5630 may disengage from the spring 5636a, 5636b. For example, the latch 5630 may not provide protection and / or limit the deformation of the spring 5636a, 5636b with the unlocked latch 5630.

As shown primarily in FIG. 59, if the latch 5630, for example, is moved and held in a proximal and / or unlocked position, the spring 5636b may not rest on the latch 5630. In such embodiments, the OZB 5602 may move in the direction A so that the distal mounting portion 5604 moves relative to the proximal portion 5622 mounts. As shown primarily in FIG. 60, the retainer 5606 of the distal attachment portion 5604 may engage with the spring 5636b and may, for example, compress and / or deform the spring 5636b. In some embodiments, the tapered surface 5608 of the latch 5606 can slide along the spring 5636b and can move the loose leg 5637 of the spring 5636b. Deformation of the spring 5636b can create a spring-loaded force by which the spring 5636b can act on the latch 5606. As shown in FIG. 61, such a springing force can affect the rotation of the latch 5606. For example, the latch 5606 can rotate in direction B and engage in the locking groove 5638 formed in the cavity 5624. In various embodiments, the latch spring 5634 can return the latch 5630 to the unlocked position, after that as the user releases the latch 5630. Moreover, if the latch 5630 returns to the unlocked position, the latch tab 5635 of the latch 5630 may block or partially block the locking groove 5638. In such embodiments the retainer 5606 of the distal attachment portion 5604 can be locked to release relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622 if the retainer 5606 is held in the locking groove 5638. Moreover, in some embodiments, the latch 5630 can hold and / or support the spring 5636b relative to the retainer 5606 until until the latch returns to its unlocked position. In various embodiments, to separate the OZB 5602 from the barrel 5620, the user can again move the latch 5630 from the locked position to the unlocked position so that the latch 5606 can rotate and exit the blocking groove 5638. In such embodiments, when the latch 5606 is rotated, compression and / or deformation of the spring 5636b until the distal attachment portion 5604 is brought out of the proximal attachment portion 5622.

In addition to the foregoing, the surgical instrument may be configured to identify, or at least attempt to identify, an end effector that is attached to the surgical instrument. As will be described in more detail below, in some embodiments, the end effector may include electrical contacts that can interact with corresponding electrical contacts on the barrel of the surgical instrument after securing the end effector to the barrel. In such embodiments, the surgical instrument controller may provide a wired connection to the end effector, and signal transmission between the controller and the end effector can be provided through such electrical contacts. As will be shown in more detail below, the end effector may contain at least one unit of information that is stored in such an effector and which can be accessed by the controller to identify the end effector. At least one unit of information may, for example, include a bit, more than one bit, byte, or more than one byte of information. In some other embodiments, the end effector may include a transmitter that can provide wireless signal transmission to the controller of the surgical instrument. Similarly to the foregoing, the end effector may contain at least one unit of information that is stored in such an effector and which can be transmitted to the controller to identify the end effector. In such embodiments, the surgical instrument controller may include a receiver or use a receiver that can receive a transmitted signal from the end effector. Such a receiver may, for example, be located on the barrel and / or handle of a surgical instrument.

The reader will understand that the end effector, which is connected to the controller wirelessly, can be performed, for example, with the possibility of providing a wireless signal. In various circumstances, the end effector may be configured to supply such a signal once or more than once. In certain circumstances, the end effector may receive a request for signal transmission at the right time and / or for multiple signal transmission in a continuous manner. In some circumstances, the end effector may include a switch that can be controlled by the user of the surgical instrument before, during and / or after the end effector of the surgical instrument is mounted on the surgical instrument. In various embodiments, the end effector switch may be an on / off switch. or a power switch that can be shorted or used to bring the end effector into working condition. In at least one embodiment, the end effector may include at least one power source, such as, for example, a battery, which can, for example, be used by a transmitter to provide a signal when the on / off switch closes. In various circumstances, after bringing the end effector into operation, the end effector controller may be configured to provide a signal and transmit a signal through a transmitter. In some circumstances, the end effector may not emit a signal until the end effector is operational. Such a configuration may, for example, provide battery saving. In certain embodiments, a surgical instrument may be put into operation in which it can wait for a signal from the end effector before the end effector switch is turned on. In various circumstances, the surgical instrument may be in standby mode or in operating mode with low power consumption, in which, after receiving a signal, the controller puts the surgical instrument in operating mode with full power consumption. In some embodiments, the end effector switch may instruct the end effector controller to transmit a signal to the surgical instrument controller. Such a switch optionally comprises a network switch; however, such a switch can be selectively brought into operation by the user to transmit a request to the end effector to transmit the signal at the right time and / or in continuous mode, starting from the right moment.

As shown in FIG. 114, an end effector, for example, such as an end effector 9560, may include a dyne or more electrical contacts, such as, for example, contacts 9561, which can be used to bring the end effector 9560 to a working state. For example, as shown in FIG. 112, the surgical instrument barrel 9040 may include a jumper 9562, which may be capable of shorting or electrically connecting two or more pins 9561 if an end effector 9560 is installed on the barrel 9040. The jumper 9562 may close the circuit with two pins 9561, a battery 9564 and at least one integrated circuit 9566 located on the printed circuit board 9565. After circuit closure, in addition to the above, the battery 9564 can provide power to the integrated circuit or circuits 9566 and dit end effector 9560 in a working condition. In various circumstances, the integrated circuit or circuits 9566 and antenna 9567 formed on the printed circuit board 9565 may comprise the controller and transmitter described above. In certain embodiments, the barrel 9040 may include a biasing member, such as, for example, a spring 9563, which may be configured to bias the jumper 9562 into a closed state with electrical contacts 9561. Before connecting the jumper 9562 to electrical contacts 9561 and / or after disconnecting the end effector 9560 from the barrel 9040 the circuit can be opened, the battery 9564 may not be supplied to the integrated circuit 9566, and / or the power supplied to the integrated circuit 9566 may be limited, and the ends th effector 9560 may be inoperative. As a result of the above, in such embodiments, the end effector assembly can be brought into operation by installing the end effector on a surgical instrument. In addition to the foregoing, in various embodiments, the design and placement of the end effector and surgical instrument may be such that only a complete and proper installation of the end effector on the surgical instrument will bring the end effector into working condition.

As described above and shown in FIG. 111, the end effector may be attached to the surgical instrument, as shown in step 9600, brought into operation, as shown in step 9602, and then can be registered on the surgical instrument, as shown in step 9604. In addition to the above, if the surgical instrument produces an attempt to register a wireless signal from the end effector, put into operation, the surgical instrument can be performed with the ability to assess the quality of such a signal. In various embodiments, an asynchronous serial communication between the end effector and the surgical instrument can be used to evaluate the quality of the signal received by the surgical instrument. For example, the end effector may provide a signal containing a start bit that precedes a data group, for example, such as an information bit, and / or a stop bit that follows a data group. In such cases, the start bit, data bit and stop bit may contain a 10-bit group of characters or, for example, a combination of bits. If the surgical instrument controller can identify the start bit and stop bit of the bit combination, in such cases the controller may assume that the data byte or data bits received between the start bit and the stop bit are correct and / or contain complete information. In various circumstances, the start bit and / or stop bit may comprise a stop period until the next bit of information is transmitted and / or until the previous bit of information is retransmitted.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 110, the surgical instrument controller may match a combination of bits or specific data bits to determine whether the data it receives is correct and / or whether it contains complete information. In various circumstances, data can be transmitted so that the controller can evaluate the data and match the data with a data pattern or patterns in accordance with which it expects to receive data. For example, such a template can be designed and organized so that the most significant data bit, for example, such as the leftmost data bit, for example, contains 1. If the controller can identify that the most significant data bit is 1, then the controller, as shown in step 9700 of FIG. 110 may perform an XOR operation on data and map the data to a data pattern or patterns that are available to the controller, as shown in step 9702. The XOR operation is well known, and for brevity, its detailed description is not provided herein. If the bit combination adopted by the surgical instrument matches the bit pattern available to the controller, the controller will need to identify the end effector. After identifying the end effector, the controller can access the stored information regarding the end effector, for example, in a memory chip accessible to the controller. If the controller determines that the most significant data bit of the received bit combination is not 1, then, as shown in step 9700, the controller may perform a bit shift operation. Many bit shifting operations are known, for example, such as arithmetic shifts, logical shifts, and / or cyclic shifts, which can be used to eliminate bits of invalid data that were received before the desired bit combination. In various circumstances, the leading or leftmost zero bit of data may be excluded, as shown in step 9704 of FIG. 110, and the bit combination may shift to the left until, for example, the leading bit becomes 1. In addition to the above, at this point, the shifted bit combination may be matched to the bit pattern in order to identify the end effector. If the shifted bit combination does not match the bit pattern, the controller can repeat the shift of the bit pattern until the next value 1 in the bit pattern becomes the leading bit, and the new shifted bit pattern can be matched with the bit pattern. Such a shift and matching operation can be carried out any suitable number of times until the end effector is identified and / or until the surgical instrument considers that the end effector cannot be identified.

The reader will understand that a surgical instrument may contain information on any suitable number of end effectors. If the end effector has been identified with a surgical instrument, in addition to the above, then the surgical instrument can access the stored information about the end effector. For example, such stored information may contain instructions for the surgical instrument regarding, firstly, the distance to which the trigger element in the end effector must be supplied to complete the launch stroke, and / or, secondly, for example, maximum power or torque, which the surgical instrument motor should be applied to the trigger element. Such information or a set of information may be unique for each end effector, and, accordingly, it is this or that identification of the end effector that allows the surgical instrument to function as desired. Without such information, the surgical instrument will not be able to set the stroke length necessary to fully utilize the end effector and / or appropriately limit the power it supplies to the trigger element. In various circumstances, the surgical instrument may rely on sensors configured to detect when the starting stroke is completed and / or an excessive level of power is supplied to the starting element. Such sensors can prevent the surgical engine from exceeding the power limit and, for example, breaking the starting element of the end effector.

In addition to the above, some end effectors may be more reliable than other end effectors, and, as a result, some end effectors can withstand the higher applied force of the surgical instrument's motor. Accordingly, other end effectors can be less reliable and, as a result, can only withstand smaller applied motor forces. In addition to the above, in order to determine the appropriate applied forces for any particular end effector, the surgical instrument must identify the end effector mounted on the surgical instrument. If the surgical instrument cannot identify the end effector, such a surgical instrument may use the default work program or mode. In the default operating mode, the surgical instrument controller can limit the power that the motor can supply to the starting element of the end effector, for example, to the minimum power or default power. The minimum power may be selected so that the motor does not damage the end effector, regardless of the particular end effector used. In some circumstances, the parameters for using the least durable or least reliable end effector that can be used with the surgical instrument can be applied in the default operating mode so that the surgical instrument will not supply excessively high power to the end effector regardless of the end effector used. In various cases, it is the use of surgical instruments with electric drive that may result from the supply of excessively high power to the end effector. In other words, the end effectors that were previously used in hand-held surgical instruments, and with the help of such hand-held surgical instruments, it was essentially impossible to damage them, however, when using an electric surgical tool, they can be easily destroyed. Moreover, such end-effectors used in the past did not use technology to identify them with surgical instruments with a drive, and as a result of applying the default work program described in this document, such end-effectors used in the past can still be used even with surgical instruments driven. At the same time, other default parameters can also be used in the default work program. For example, the default work program may use the minimum start stroke length or the default length. In various cases, the shortest stroke length of the end effector, which can be used with a surgical instrument, can be used by default in the work program. In such cases, the trigger element will not come into contact or collapse as a result of contact with the distal end of the end effector, regardless of which end effector is used.

The reader will understand that for a surgical instrument that contains stored information about the end effectors used with the surgical instrument, there may be a need to update the information available for such a surgical instrument. For example, if the preferred operating parameters for a particular end effector change over time, updating the information stored in each surgical instrument may be required. In addition, updating information in surgical instruments may also be required if a new end effector is being developed for use with such surgical instruments. If the information in the surgical instrument is not updated in a timely manner, the surgical instrument may not be able to identify the end effector and, as a result, use the default work program that is described in this document. In various embodiments, the implementation of the surgical instrument may not contain stored information regarding the end effectors or at least some end effectors that can be used with the surgical instrument. In such embodiments, the end effector may comprise stored information or parameters related to the end effector. Such parameters may be available and / or transmitted to a surgical instrument. In addition to the above, in various circumstances, installing an end effector on a surgical instrument may contribute to inducing an end effector signal that can be received by the surgical instrument. In addition, similarly to the above, a signal transmission request may be transmitted to the end effector. In various circumstances, such a signal may be transmitted to the surgical instrument via a wired and / or wireless connection. In some embodiments, a surgical instrument may request a signal to be transmitted to the end effector.

In addition to the above, the end effector may contain data about one or more parameters relative to the end effector, which are stored in its memory. Such parameters may be stored, for example, in one or more memorable devices. In various circumstances, such parameters may include the desired starting speed of the starting element, the desired speed of retraction of the starting element, the distance or travel of the starting element, the maximum torque that will be applied to the starting element by the surgical instrument motor, and / or the maximum swivel angle of the end an effector, if, for example, such an end effector is indeed a hinged end effector. Some articulated end effectors are described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 803,097, entitled HINGED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTAINING A STARTER ACTUATOR, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. As for the parameter relating to the maximum angle of articulation, the controller may use such a parameter to limit the range of articulation that the articulated section may deviate. In some cases, the maximum angle of articulation can be 45 degrees, for example, which is measured relative to the longitudinal axis of the barrel of a surgical instrument. As for, for example, a parameter related to the starting speed and / or the retraction speed of the starting element, the parameter may contain data about the desired speed of the starting element and / or, for example, a percentage or fraction of the maximum engine speed. For example, a value of 3 for starting speed may mean that the controller must control the engine at 30% of its maximum speed, for example, when pulling out the starting element. In addition, for example, a value of 5 for the retraction speed may mean that the controller must control the engine at 50% of its maximum speed, for example, when retracting the starting element. As for, for example, a parameter relating to the maximum engine torque, the parameter may contain data on the maximum torque value and / or, for example, a percentage or fraction of the maximum engine torque value. In addition, with respect to, for example, a parameter relating to the stroke length of the trigger element, such a parameter may contain data on the desired distance at which the trigger element can be fed and / or retracted, and / or, for example, a percentage or fraction of the maximum stroke length of the surgical tool. For example, a value of 60 may indicate that the starting stroke should be, for example, 60 mm. In various cases, parameter values may be transmitted in any suitable format, including a binary format containing, for example, bits and / or data bytes. An example implementation of a set of parameters is presented in FIG. 110A.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the surgical instrument may be configured to receive parameters from the end effector in a specific order. For example, the signal coming from the end effector may contain a start bit, a first bit combination for a first parameter, for example, a maximum swivel angle, a second bit combination for a second parameter, such as a starting speed, a third bit combination for a third parameter, for example, a speed retraction, a fourth combination of bits for a fourth parameter, for example, maximum engine torque, a fifth combination of bits for a fifth parameter, for example, stroke length, and, for example, a stop bit. This is just one example. Any suitable number of parameters may be transmitted as a component of the signal. Moreover, any suitable number of start bits and / or stop bits may be used. For example, a start bit may precede a combination of bits of each parameter, and / or a stop bit may follow after a combination of bits of each parameter. As described above, the use of at least one start bit and / or at least one stop bit can simplify the analysis of the quality of the signal from the end effector by the controller of the surgical instrument. In certain embodiments, the start bit and / or stop bit may not be used. Moreover, the end effector can transmit multiple signals for transmitting end effector parameters to a surgical instrument.

In addition to the above, in various circumstances, the surgical instrument controller may use a checksum to evaluate the quality of the signal received from the end effector and / or the fact that the received signal is authentic, i.e., the signal from the recognized end effector. The checksum may contain a value that is used to ensure that there is no error in the storage, transmission and / or reception of data. It can be obtained, for example, by calculating binary data values and a certain combination of binary values using some algorithm. For example, binary data values can be summed, although many other algorithms can be used. In embodiments where parameters associated with specific end effectors are stored in a surgical instrument as described above, a checksum value may also be stored for each such end effect effect. In the process of application, the controller of the surgical instrument can provide access to the parameter data and the value of the checksum, and after calculating the calculated value of the checksum, the controller can compare the calculated value of the checksum with the stored value of the checksum. If the calculated value of the checksum is equal to the stored value of the checksum, the controller can conclude that all the data extracted from the memory of the surgical instrument is correct. At this stage, the controller may provide control of the surgical instrument in accordance with data loaded from memory. If the calculated value of the checksum is not equal to the stored value of the checksum, the controller can conclude that at least one block of the data retrieved from the memory is incorrect. In addition to the above, in various cases, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise transmit a message about the actions to the user of the surgical instrument. In certain cases, the controller may retry loading data from the memory of the surgical instrument and repeat the calculation of the checksum and its comparison, which are described above. If the recalculated checksum value and the stored checksum value are the same, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with data loaded from memory. If the recalculated checksum value and the stored checksum value do not match, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise transmit an action message to the user of the surgical instrument.

 In those embodiments where the parameters related to the end effector are stored in the memory of the end effector as described above, the checksum may also, for example, be stored in the memory of the end effector. During use, the surgical instrument controller can access the parameter data and the stored checksum value. In addition to the above, in various cases, the end effector may transmit one or more signals that transmit parameters and checksum values to a surgical instrument. As a result of the above, the stored checksum value and parameters can be transmitted simultaneously, and for the purposes of the description herein, the checksum value received by the surgical instrument can be considered as the accepted checksum value. Similarly to the above, after receiving these parameters, the controller can calculate the value of the checksum on the basis of these parameters, that is, calculate the calculated value of the checksum and compare the calculated value of the checksum with the received value of the checksum. If the calculated value of the checksum is equal to the accepted value of the checksum, the controller can conclude that all the parameters extracted from the end effector are correct. At this stage, the controller may provide control of the surgical instrument in accordance with data downloaded from the end effector. If the calculated value of the checksum is not equal to the accepted value of the checksum, the controller can conclude that at least one block of the extracted data is incorrect. In addition to the above, in various cases, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise transmit a message about the actions to the user of the surgical instrument. Such situations can often occur when data is transferred from the end effector to a surgical instrument, for example, through one or more wireless sessions. In any case, in certain embodiments, the controller may retry loading data from the end effector and repeat the calculation of the checksum and its comparison, which are described above. If the recalculated checksum value and the accepted checksum value are the same, the controller can control the surgical instrument in accordance with the data downloaded from the end effector. If the recalculated checksum value and the accepted checksum value do not match, then, in addition to the above, the controller can then provide control of the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise send a message about the actions to the user of the surgical instrument. As a result of the above, in various embodiments, it is not necessary to store in the memory of the surgical instrument any information regarding the end effectors that are used in the operation of the surgical instrument with the end effect effector installed. In such circumstances, all data regarding the parameters of the end effector, the value of the checksum, which is used to confirm the integrity of the data, can be stored in the memory of the end effector. A surgical instrument may include an operating system that requires input of sufficient initial information from an end effector in order to use such an end effector. This may not require a special work program for each end effector that can be used with such a surgical instrument. A single work program can be used with any end effector. Thus, there is no need to update the memory of the surgical instrument to include work programs for additional end effectors and / or, for example, modified programs for existing effectors.

As shown in FIG. 149-154, in addition to or instead of the wireless communication systems that are used to identify the end effector mounted on the surgical instrument described herein, the surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment may include means for scanning and identification end effector. In FIG. 153 depicts a handle 11020 with a barcode reader 11022 that can be configured to scan the barcode shown in FIG. 149 and 150, at an end effector 11060 shown in FIG. 151, 152, and 154. Like other embodiments described herein, end effector 11060 may include a barrel portion, an abutment 11062, and / or a cassette 11064 with brackets, in which, for example, one or more portions of end effector 11060 may include the barcode applied to them. In some embodiments, the end effector 11060 may include a removable component 11063 located between the abutment 11062 and the cassette 11064 with brackets, which can be removed before or after installing the end effector 11060 on the surgical instrument. In FIG. 151 shows an embodiment of placing a barcode 11065 on a portion of a barrel of an end effector 11060. In FIG. 152 shows an embodiment of placing a barcode 11065 on a removable component 11063. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument handle 11020 may include a barcode reader, such as, for example, a barcode reader 11024 capable of reading a barcode on end effector. For example, as shown primarily in FIG. 154, the handle 11020 may include a portion 11022 of an internal barcode reader configured to read a barcode 11065 applied to the barrel of an end effector 11060. In at least one such case, a portion 11022 of the barcode reader may include a chute 11026, the size and shape of which is adapted to receive the barrel of the end effector 11060, moreover, a barcode reader 11024 can be installed in it within and / or opposite the hole 11027 formed in the chute 11026, so that the barcode reader 11024 can read the barcode 11065. As the reader will understand, many different barcode readers and barcode processing protocols are known, and in this case any of the suitable methods can be used. In some cases, the barcode may contain bi-directional information, which allows, for example, to read the barcode in two different directions. In some cases, a barcode can use many information layers. In some cases, the barcode reading protocol may include input information that precedes the information identifying the end effector and / or otherwise transmit information to the surgical instrument that will allow the surgical instrument to perform operations or to execute a specific work program. In some cases, a barcode reader may emit one or more light rays that can be incident on a plurality of peaks and valleys forming a barcode. In some cases, the hollows of the barcode may extend inward and / or form inside the barrel body of the end effector. The emitted light rays can be reflected on a barcode reader, where they can be processed. At the same time, the barcode reader 11024 of the handle 11020 is positioned and installed in the trough 11026 so as to limit or at least substantially limit the region of emitted and reflected light rays within the area 11022 of the barcode reader. Due to this, the barcode reader 11024 will not be able to accidentally or unintentionally scan another end effector, for example, an end effector, which is different from that intended for installation on this surgical instrument and which may be located in the operating room.

In addition to the above, in various cases, the end effector may pass through the barcode reader of the surgical instrument until the end effector is finally installed on the surgical instrument. In various alternative embodiments, the surgical instrument may include a movable barcode reader that can be used to scan the barcode of the end effector after installing the end effector on the surgical instrument. In any case, after identifying the end effector, at least in certain circumstances, the controller can access a work program configured to use the identified end effector. A barcode in one form or another may contain a system loader. In other circumstances, as indicated in other sections of this document, a barcode may provide the controller with the necessary information or parameters for using a standard operating system. In certain circumstances, each end effector may be assigned a sequential identification number so that any two end effectors, even if they belong to the same type of end effector, can have two different barcodes printed on them. In such circumstances, the controller may be configured to block the use of an end effector that was previously scanned with a surgical instrument. Such a system may, for example, exclude the possibility of reuse of at least partially spent end effector.

As described above, the end effector may be configured to exchange data with a surgical instrument through a wireless connection and / or wired connection. As for the wired connection, then, as shown in FIG. 115, the proximal end of the end effector, for example, such as the proximal end 9969 of the end effector 9960, may comprise a plurality of electrical contacts 9968, which may be in electrical connection with a plurality of electrical contacts 9948 located on and / or within the distal end 9942 of the surgical shaft 9940 tool. As shown primarily in FIG. 116, each electrical contact 9968 may include a contact element 9967, which is at least partially located within the cavity 9965 of the element. Each electrical contact 9968 may also include a biasing element, such as, for example, a spring 9966, which is located between the contact element 9967 and the inner side wall of the cavity 9965 of the element. Spring 9966 may be configured to bias the contact element radially outward. Contact element 9967 may comprise a protector 9964 protruding therefrom, which can move with displacement into engagement with the other inner side wall of the element cavity 9965 under the action of the spring 9966, at least until the end effector 9960 is mounted on the barrel 9940. The interaction between the limiter 9964 and the side wall of the cavity 9965 element can prevent the movement of the contact element 9967 out. When the end effector 9960 is installed on the barrel 9940, the contact elements 9967 of the electrical contacts 9968 can be supplied inward by the action of the electrical contacts 9948 of the barrel, counteracting the biasing force exerted by the springs 9966, as shown in FIG. 116. In various circumstances, each pair of contacts 9948 and 9968 may comprise a communications circuit or channel 9950. Although three pairs of contacts are shown in the above example, any suitable number of contacts and / or communication channels may be used. As shown in FIG. 117, the barrel contacts 10048 in each case may comprise a movable member 10047 and a biasing spring 10046 configured to press the movable members 10047 to the corresponding contacts 10068 of the end effector. As shown in FIG. 118, in some embodiments, one or both of the end effector and barrel contact may comprise a flexible portion. For example, the end effector may include flexible contacts 10168, which can elastically interact with the corresponding contacts 9948 of the barrel.

As for the embodiments described above, in various circumstances, the end effector may be mounted on the barrel along the longitudinal axis. As shown primarily in FIG. 115, the most proximal contact 9968 of the end effector first comes into electrical contact with the most distal contact 9948 of the barrel. As the reader will understand, at the moment of the interaction of such contacts, the end effector 9960 is not completely fixed on the barrel 9940. Although this interaction between these contacts may be temporary, that is, until the deeper landing of the end effector 9960 on the barrel 9940, the controller of the surgical instrument may be disoriented and may misinterpret one or more signals of the 9960 end effector. A similar situation with incorrect interpretation may occur at a time when the longitudinal matrix of contacts The 9968 end effector gradually comes into contact with the longitudinal matrix of contacts 9948 of the barrel until the end effector 9940 is fully seated. In various embodiments, the controller of the surgical instrument can be configured to ignore the signals transmitted through the contacts until the proximal contact 9968 of the end effector itself interacts with the most proximal pin 9948 of the barrel. As shown in FIG. 119 and 120, one of the pairs of contacts may differ from the other pairs of contacts so that the controller can identify which pair of contacts is in the contact, and as a result, the end effector is fully seated. For example, the end effector and the trunk of a surgical instrument may include a first pair of contacts 10248a, 10268a, a second pair of contacts 10248b 10268b and a third pair of contacts 10248c, 10268c, and such a third pair of contacts may differ from the first pair of contacts and from the second pair of contacts. If the first pair of contacts 10248a, 10268a begins to interact, the contact element 10267a can be supplied inward so that the first connection section 10263a of the contact element 10267a comes into contact with the first connection section 9951a of the communication channel 9950a, and the second connection section 10264a of the contact element 10267a comes into contact with the second a portion 9952a of the communication channel 9950a. In this position of the contact element 10267a, both the first circuit section 9951a and the second circuit section 9952a can transmit a signal through the contact element 10267a. If the second pair of contacts 10248b, 10268b starts to interact, the contact element 10267b can be supplied inward so that the first connection section 10263b of the contact element 10267b comes into contact with the first communication section 9951b of the communication channel 9950b, and the second connection section 10264b of the contact element 10267b comes into contact with the second section 9952b of the circuit channel 9950b communication. In this position of the contact element 10267b, both the first portion of the circuit 9951b and the second portion of the circuit 9952b can transmit a signal through the contact element 10267b. If the third pair of contacts 10248c, 10268c starts to interact, the contact element 10267c can be supplied inward so that the first connection section 10263c of the contact element 10467c contacts the first section 9951c of the communication channel 9950c, and the second connection section 10264c of the contact element 10267c comes out of contact with the second section 9952c of the circuit channel 9950c communication and comes into contact with the first section 9951c circuit. In this position of the contact element 10267a, the first portion of the circuit 9951c can transmit a signal through the contact element 10267c. As a result of the above, for the first, second, and third set of contacts, a special connection procedure can be provided with their respective communication channels when the end effector is fully seated, and the controller can be configured to determine the state of such a full fit. For example, at the initial instant of installation of the end effector on the barrel, the third contact 10264c may first come into contact with the first contact 10248a of the barrel. In this position, only two sections of the circuit, i.e., 9951a and 9952a, can transmit a signal from the end effector to the controller, and, accordingly, the controller can be configured to detect different voltage drops on the connections compared to the voltage drop observed in In the event that all five sections, for example, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b, 9952b and 9951c, can transmit a signal when the end effector is fully fitted. Similarly, the end effector can be further inserted into the barrel until the third contact 10267c comes into contact with the second barrel contact 10248b and the second contact 10267b comes into contact with the first barrel contact 10248a. In this position, only four sections of the circuit, i.e., 9951a, 9952a, 9951b and 9952b, can transmit a signal from the end effector to the controller, and, accordingly, the controller can be configured to detect different voltage drops on the connections compared to the voltage drop which occurs when all five sections, for example, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b, 9952b and 9951c, can transmit a signal when the end effector is fully fitted.

In some cases, if the end effector is mounted on an elongated shaft of the surgical instrument, the operator can activate the drive system and / or the swivel system of the end effector, for example, to close, start and / or swivel the end effector. The end effector may include a first jaw, a second jaw and one or more sensors configured to detect the position of the first jaw relative to the second jaw. As shown in FIG. 121-124, the end effector 10360 may comprise a first jaw or emphasis 10362 and a second jaw or cartridge 10364 with brackets, wherein the emphasis 10362 can move to and from the cartridge 10364 with brackets. The end effector 10360 is often inserted into the patient’s body through a trocar, while the end effector 10360 may not always be clearly visible, even with an endoscope. As a result, the user of the surgical instrument may not be able to accurately assess the position of the stop 10362 relative to the second jaw 10364. As indicated above, to facilitate the use of the end effector, the end effector 10360 may include a sensor for detecting the position of the stop 10362. In various circumstances, such a sensor may be configured to detect a gap between the focus 10362 and the cassette 10364 with brackets. Some sensors may be configured to detect the angular position of the stop 10362 relative to the cartridge 10364 with brackets. Such sensors are described in U.S. Patent Application No. 13 / 800,025, entitled CARTRIDGE SOCKET SYSTEMS FOR RECORDING FABRIC THICKNESS filed March 13, 2013, and U.S. Patent Application No. 13 / 800,067, entitled CARTRIDGE SENSOR SYSTEM FOR BOOKING FABRIC, filed March 13, 2013. All the information described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 800,025, entitled SYSTEM OF CARTRIDGE SENSORS FOR BRACKETS FOR RECORDING FABRIC THICKNESS, filed March 13, 2013, and US Patent Application No. 13 / 800,067, entitled CARTRIDGE SENSOR SYSTEM WITH BRACKETS FOR FABRIC THICKNESS REGISTRATION filed March 13, 2013 is incorporated herein by reference. Regardless of the sensor or sensors used, the position of the abutment 10362 can be transmitted to the user of the surgical instrument via a screen. Such a screen can be placed on the end effector 10360 and / or on the barrel of a surgical instrument, for example, on the barrel 10340. If the screen is placed on the end effector, the screen can be seen, for example, using an endoscope. In such cases, the screen can be located on the end effector so that it is not obscured by the trocar, which ensures the introduction of the end effector into the surgical field. In other words, the screen can be placed so that during application it can be distal to the distal end of the trocar. If the screen is placed on the barrel, such a screen can be located on the barrel so that it is not obscured by the trocar. In other words, the screen can be placed so that during application it can be proximal to the proximal end of the trocar. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 121-124, the screen 10390 is located on the barrel 10340.

As shown in FIG. 121, the stop 10362 of the end effector 10360 is shown in the fully open position. In this position of the stop 10362, the trigger element 10330 of the end effector 10360 is in the proximal position and has not yet been distally extended. As will be described in more detail below, the trigger 10330 extends distally to move the stop 10362 to the cassette 10364 with brackets. The position of the trigger element 10330 shown in FIG. 121, may reflect the inactive, most proximal position of the trigger element 10300. If, as shown primarily in FIG. 125, the stop 10362 is in the fully open position, the stop screen 10390 is not illuminated. As the reader will understand, on the stop screen 10390, the position of the stop 10362 may be reflected in one of several different positions. The stop screen 10390 is able to display the five possible positions of the stop 10362; other options are contemplated, which may include a stop screen using more than five indicators or less than five indicators. When the stop 10362 moves from its open position to its closed position, the screen 10390 can sequentially display the position of the stop 10362 using indicators 10391-10395. Indicator 10391 displays the stop 10362 in a slightly closed position. Indicators 10392, 10393, and 10394 display an emphasis 10362 in partially closed positions. Indicator 10395 displays the stop 10362 in a fully closed, or parallel, position. When comparing FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, it will become clear to the reader that the trigger 10330 has been distally extended to at least partially close the stop 10362. If the stop 10362 is in the position shown in FIG. 122, the stop position sensor can detect a new stop position 10362, and, as shown in FIG. 126, the indicator 10391 of the stop screen 10390 may light up. When comparing FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, it will become clear to the reader that the trigger 10330 has been distally extended to further close, although not completely close, the stop 10362. If the stop 10362 is in the position shown in FIG. 123, the stop position sensor can detect a new stop position 10362, and, as shown in FIG. 127, the indicator 10393 may light. When comparing FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, the reader will understand that the emphasis 10362, for example, was rotated about 10 degrees and that when the emphasis 10362 was rotated, for example, only about 5 degrees, the indicator 10392 of the emphasis screen 103 would turn on. From a comparison of FIG. 123 and FIG. 124 it can be seen that the trigger 10330 was distally extended to completely close the stop 10362. If the stop 10362 is in the position shown in FIG. 124, the stop position sensor can detect a new stop position 10362, and, as shown in FIG. 128, the indicator 10395 may light up. When comparing FIG. 123 and FIG. 124 the reader will understand that the emphasis 10362, for example, was rotated about 10 degrees and that when the emphasis 10362 was rotated, for example, only about 5 degrees, the indicator 10394 of the emphasis screen 103 would turn on.

In addition to the foregoing, the end effector and / or surgical instrument may include a controller that can be configured to control the abutment screen 10390. For example, if the end effector includes an abutment screen 10390, the controller may reside in the end effector. If the barrel of the surgical instrument includes an abutment screen 10390 and / or any other portion of the surgical instrument includes an abutment screen 10390, the controller may be located in the surgical instrument. In other embodiments, one of the end effector and the surgical instrument may include an abutment screen 10390, while the other of the end effector and the surgical instrument may include a controller. In either case, the stop sensor or sensors can exchange signals with the controller. The controller may be configured to interpret one or more sensor signals or sensors to determine the position of the stop 10362. The controller may be coupled to the stop screen 10390 in order to enable the indicators 10391-10395 to turn on. In various circumstances, each of indicators 10391-10395 may, for example, comprise an LED. In such circumstances, each LED can be in electrical connection with the output channel of the microprocessor of the controller so that the controller can selectively turn on one or another LED independently of other LEDs. In various cases, the controller can continuously evaluate the position of the stop 10362 based on the data received from the stop sensor, and using this data to continuously determine which of the indicators will turn on. For example, with an open or closed stop 10362, the controller can track the position of the stop 10362 and display such information in a timely manner to the user of the surgical instrument using indicators 10391-10395. In such cases, the user is provided with real-time or almost real-time feedback with information on the position of the stop 10362. In other cases, the controller can set a delay for displaying information on the position of the stop 10362 until the stop 10362 stops moving or, at least, essentially does not stop moving, for example, for a certain period of time. As the reader will understand, indicators 10391-10395 can display individual positions of the stop 10362; however, there is a possibility that the stop 10362 can pass through each of these individual positions only for a very short period of time if, for example, it is in the closed state. In various circumstances, the controller may use one or another algorithm to determine which of the indicators should turn on. For example, the controller may employ an algorithm that determines which of the indicators more accurately displays the position of the stop 10362, even though the position of the stop 10362 may not be compatible with any of the individual positions that may be displayed by the indicator screen 10390. In various circumstances, the controller may include two adjacent indicators on the indicator screen 10390, if the emphasis 10362 is in an intermediate position between two separate positions represented by two adjacent indicators.

In addition to the above, in various circumstances, each of the indicators 10391-10395 may include an LED that emits light of the same color or at least essentially the same color. In other cases, one or more indicators 10391-10395 may emit light whose color is different from the color of other indicators 10391-10395. For example, indicator 10391 may be configured to emit yellow light, while indicators 10392-10395 may be configured to emit, for example, green light. As the reader will understand, as shown in FIG. 122, the fabric T located between the stop 10362 and the cassette 10364 may not be fully clamped by the stop 10362 if the stop 10362 is in the partially closed position shown in FIG. 122, and if the indicator 10391 associated with this stop position 10362 lights up in yellow, the surgical instrument user is reminded to exercise caution before moving the end effector 10360 and / or continuing with the brackets. In some embodiments, one or more indicators 10361-10365 in each case may be configured to emit light of more than one color. For example, each indicator 10361-10365 may include an LED configured to emit green and red light. In such cases, indicators 10361-10365 may emit green light, indicating the position of the stop 10362, as indicated above, or alternatively emit red light when an error occurs in the end effector 10360 and / or surgical instrument.

As described above, the stop of the end effector can be arranged to move relative to the cassette with brackets between the open position and the closed position, and the surgical instrument system can be configured to detect movement of the stop and transmit information about the movement of the stop to the user. It also considers options for implementation in which the cassette with brackets moves relative to the stop. In at least one such embodiment, the emphasis may be locked or unable to rotate. When fixing or blocking the rotation, the emphasis may rigidly protrude from the portion of the end effector frame; such a portion of the end effector frame, from which the abutment protrudes, and the cassette with brackets may be able to pivotally rotate relative to another portion of the end effector or the trunk of a surgical instrument. Regardless of whether the end effector is characterized by the possibility of articulated rotation, the cassette with brackets can rotate relative to the stop. The systems and methods for detecting stop movement described herein can be extended to detecting movement of a cartridge with brackets. Moreover, the systems and methods described herein for displaying the movement of the stop can be extended to display the movement of the cartridge with brackets.

In various embodiments, the operator may need to retract the drive element during the starting stroke. The surgical instrument described in Zemlok publication No. 763 uses a retracting assembly that includes a manual mechanical interface with a drive tube that moves when exposed to a ratchet mechanism triggered by a retracting lever mounted on the handle. This arrangement allows the doctor to retract the launch rod and, ultimately, the drive element of the loading block, if during the installation of the brackets there is a malfunction in the power source, or the motor, or the control system. However, problems may arise in the efficient use of such a retracting assembly, since the engine and the engine gear remain engaged in the ratchet operation (activation) mechanism. Thus, the retraction unit of such a device must provide sufficient torque to rotate the gears in the gearbox and the motor shaft to allow manual rotation of the drive tube. The formation of such forces can create an extreme load on the components of the retraction unit, which can lead to a catastrophic failure of the retraction unit. Surgical Instruments 10 shown in FIG. 1-28, can be performed using unique and innovative mechanisms of the retraction unit, which can eliminate the likelihood of this and other problems.

For example, the surgical instrument 10 may include a retracting unit 120, which includes a retracting unit 124 with an upper portion 126 and a lower portion 128. In various forms, the retracting unit 120 is mechanically connected to the drive tube 102 via a drive gear 130 and a retraction gear 132. See FIG. 5. The drive gear 130 is rotatably connected to the drive tube 102 such that turning the drive gear 130 causes the drive tube 102 to rotate. The drive gear 130 and the retraction gear 132 may comprise bevel gears or the like to provide gear engagement therebetween. as shown in FIG. 5. The retracting gear 132 may be coupled to the first spindle 134 (FIGS. 4 and 5), which is substantially perpendicular to the upper and lower portions 126 and 128 of the retracting unit 124 and extends between them. The spindle 134 may be fixed to rotate about the axis of the SA-SA spindle, which is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the surgical instrument 10. See FIG. 5. In various forms, the retraction gear 132 may have a first spur gear 136 associated therewith. The first spur gear 136 is meshed with a second spur gear 138 that is operatively mounted on a second spindle 137, which is also mounted in a substantially perpendicular position between the upper and the lower sections 126 and 128 of the block 124 of the retraction and provides for the possibility of rotation around the determined thus the second axis SA'-SA 'of the shaft. The second spur gear 138 is fixed by gearing with a third spur gear 140, which is located on the first spindle 134. The third spur gear 140 is connected to the first clutch portion 144 of the freewheel assembly 142. The freewheel assembly 142 also includes a second clutch portion 146 that is rotatably mounted on the first spindle 134 above the first clutch portion 144. A spring or springs (not shown) may be located between the first and second engagement portions 144 and 146, thereby holding the first and second engagement portions 144 and 146 in a raised “unengaged” position, as shown in FIG. 5

It will be apparent that when the drive tube 102 is rotated, the drive gear 130 will cause the first, second, and third spur gears 136, 138, 140 to rotate, as well as the first clutch portion 144 and corresponding spindles 134, 137. Since the second clutch portion 146 can rotate around the spindle 134 and disengaged from the first clutch portion 144 by means of a spring mechanism (not shown) located between them, the rotation of the first clutch portion 144 is not progressively transmitted to the second clutch portion 146. As shown in FIG. 5, the first and second engagement portions 144 and 146 include a plurality of engagement teeth 148, each of which has a flat engagement surface and an inclined displacement surface. As will be described in more detail below, the second clutch portion 146 may shift in gear engagement with the first clutch portion 144 under the action of the retract lever 150. The bias surfaces of the teeth 148 allow the engagement surfaces to come into contact with each of the teeth so that the rotation of the second engagement portion 146 causes the rotation of the first engagement portion 144. The rotation of the first clutch portion 144 also causes the rotation of all gears that are engaged, and also then transfers the torque to the drive tube 102 about the longitudinal axis LA-LA.

As shown in FIG. 6, the retracting lever 150 may comprise an elongated handle portion 152 that includes a cam portion 154. The cam portion 154 may include an opening in which an overrunning clutch needle bearing (not shown) may be mounted, which is attached by mechanical contact with the clutch (not shown) connected to the first spindle 134 to allow the retracting lever 150 to pivot about the first spindle 134. Zemlok '763 also describes the operation of such an overrunning clutch needle bearing assembly ke with the clutch, and it is fully incorporated herein by reference. In various forms, the retract lever 150 includes one or more cam elements 156, each of which has a cam surface 158 formed thereon. In a first position, the retract lever 150 is located along a recess for the lever 14 of the housing 12, as shown in FIG. 1. A spring located between the first and second clutch portions 144, 146 serves to spring the retract lever 150 relative to the upper portion 126 of the retract unit 124. As shown in FIG. 6, cam elements 156 are positioned within respective cam grooves or recesses 160 in the upper portion 126 of the retractor 124. The retract lever 150 is held in the first position by a return spring 162 that is mounted between the upper portion 126 of the retract unit 124 and the cam portion 154 of the retract lever 150. Cam elements 156 and cam grooves 160 prevent further rotation of the retract lever 150.

During use, if the retract lever 150 leaves the recess 14 of the lever (FIG. 1) in the housing 12, the cam elements 156 come into contact with the respective cam grooves 160 to shift the cam portion 154 of the retract lever 150 in a downward direction, counteracting the biasing force of the spring (springs) located between the first and second clutch portions 144, 146. This downward movement results in compression of the spring (s) and feeds the first and second clutch portions 144, 146 into the locking engagement. Rotating the cam portion 154 counterclockwise drives the needle bearing of the overrunning clutch, which is connected to the clutch and the first spindle 134. Continuous advancement of the retract lever 150 causes the clutch assembly 142 to rotate, which in turn rotates the spur gears 136, 138, 140 and gears 132 and 130 retract and drive. Thus, in turn, the drive tube 102 rotates around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool. Since the trigger rod 104 is threadedly engaged with the drive tube 102, pivoting the drive tube 102 as described above causes the trigger rod 104 to retract (or proximal axial movement) into the drive tube 102.

In operation, the drive tube 102 may be rotatable in the opposite direction to the retraction direction (for example, in a clockwise direction) around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool by the engine 100. Such rotation of the drive tube 102 causes the trigger rod 104 to move axis in the distal direction DD. Such an extension of the starter rod 104 and the drive element 60 of the loading unit 20 may be referred to herein as “triggering”. As shown, for example, in FIG. 5, the gear assembly 170 is used to determine the amount of drive torque needed to feed the starter rod 104 in the distal direction DD in order to drive the loading unit 20. The gear assembly 170 may include a gear housing 172 that is coupled to engine 100. For example, gear housing 172 may be coupled to motor housing 101 by screws 103 or other mechanical fasteners and / or fastening mechanisms. The gear assembly 170 and the engine 100 may collectively be referred to as a “drive unit”, which is essentially referred to as member 186.

The gear housing 172 can be rotatably mounted in a portion 190 of a motor limiter, which is integral with the housing 12 or is mounted without rotation. This arrangement allows the drive unit 186 to rotate inside the housing 12 around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool, but prevents its axial movement inside the housing 12. The engine 100 may, for example, be powered by a power source 200 of the type described in more detail in Zemlok ' 763, and / or from the power supply system 2000 (FIG. 129).

To simplify the supply of electric current to the drive unit 180 and, in particular, to the motor 100, a unique contact circuit 210 can be used. For example, the contact circuit 210 may include an annular negative motor contact 212 and an annular positive motor contact 114 located on the motor housing 101, as shown in FIG. 4. The fixed negative contact 216 can be fixed on the housing 12 to move in contact with the negative contact 112 of the engine. Similarly, a fixed positive contact 218 can be locked to move in contact with a positive contact 214 of the engine when the drive unit 180 is rotated inside the housing 12. The fixed negative and positive contacts 216, 218 can contain flexible spring contacts to facilitate assembly of the drive unit 186 inside the housing 12. Fixed the negative contact 216 can be electrically connected to the power source 200 through the negative wire 220, and a fixed positive contact 218 can be electrically connected to the power source 200 through the positive wire 222. This contact circuit allows you to apply electric power from the power source 200 to the engine 100, while providing rotation of the drive unit 186 in the handle housing about the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool.

As shown in FIG. 5, the gear assembly 170 may comprise a planetary gear unit that is operatively coupled to an engine shaft 107. For example, in one installation, an annular gear 173 may be formed on the inner surface of the gear housing 172. The driving Central gear 171 may be associated with the shaft 107 of the engine. The driving center gear 171 may be in gearing with a plurality of first planetary gears 175 that are mounted on the first planet carrier 174 of the planetary gears so that they are also in gearing with the ring gear 173. The first center gear 176 may be formed or otherwise fixed to the first carrier 174 planetary gears and can be fixed due to gearing with the second planetary gears 178, which are mounted on the second carrier 177 planetary gears. The second planetary gears 178 are also fixed in gear engagement with the ring gear 173. The second central gear 179 may be formed or otherwise mounted on the second planet carrier gear 177 and may be fixed by gearing by a plurality of third planetary gears 181. The third planetary gears 181 may be attached on the third carrier 180 planetary gears in gearing with the ring gear 173. The third central gear 183 may be formed or otherwise fixed on the third in One of the planetary gears is 180 and gears with a plurality of fourth planetary gears 187, which can be connected to the output shaft unit 184, which is rotatably mounted in the gear housing 172 using a bearing 185. The fourth planetary gears 187 are also fixed in the ring gear gear 173.

In FIG. 7 illustrates one rotation mount option of the drive unit 186 in the housing 12. As shown in this figure, the engine mounting platform 192 on the engine stop 190 may include a gear housing segment 196 that is rotatably mounted inside. For example, in one attachment option, the gear assembly 170 is mounted on a gear housing housing segment 196, rotatably with a bearing 185. Similarly, the engine 100 is rotatably mounted in a portion 13 of a motor mounting housing with a bearing 198. Other drive attachment methods can also be used. block 186 with the possibility of rotation in the housing 12.

The output shaft unit 184 may be operatively coupled to a clutch 230 (FIG. 5) of this type and design as described in Zemlok publication No. 763, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Further details can be found in this publication regarding the design and operation of such a clutch 230. However, in an alternative embodiment, the clutch 230 may be replaced by a two-barrel coupler or sleeve that serves to connect the output shaft unit 184 directly to the drive tube 102.

If a surgical instrument, which is capable of moving along the axis of the drive rod, described in Zemlok publication No. 763, or the power supply to the instrument is disconnected, is stuck, the user had to use the retraction unit to return the drive rod to its original position, which allows the loading unit to be removed. However, the effective retraction was complicated by the fact that the retraction system had to create sufficient torque necessary for the return motion of many gears in the gear assembly. Thus, the effective operation of such a retraction system could be difficult.

In at least one embodiment of a surgical instrument described herein, a unique and innovative release locking system of a drive unit is used to solve such a problem, which is essentially referred to as element 240. For example, as will be described in more detail below if the locking system 240 of the drive unit with the possibility of release is in the "locked" position, the rotation of the drive unit 186 inside the housing 12 of the handle becomes impossible. The drive unit 186 is held in a locked position when the surgical tool is “triggered” to transmit engine torque from the engine 100 through the gear assembly 170 and ultimately to the drive tube 102. If it becomes necessary to actuate the retract assembly 120, system 240 blocking of the drive unit is moved to the "unlocked" position to allow the drive unit 186 to rotate freely inside the housing 12, thereby eliminating the need to create a sufficient return torque for the return movement of the gear mechanism in the gear assembly 170. The gear assembly 170 may remain operatively connected between the engine 100 and the drive tube 102 during operation of the retraction assembly 120. In such embodiments, although the gear assembly 170 remains operatively connected to the engine 100 and the drive tube 102, free rotation of the drive unit 186 can reduce the amount of torque needed to rotate the gear assembly 170 when the gear mechanism retracts to retract the drive tube 102. Such a reduction in the required amount of torque can increase the efficiency of the retraction system.

For example, as can be seen in FIG. 8, the third spur gear 140 of the retracting assembly 120 may include an unlocking cam 141 that is operable to actuate the locking dog assembly 250 of the drive blocking system 240. One form of blocking dog assembly 250 is shown in FIG. 9-11. For example, as can be seen in FIG. 10, the blocking dog assembly 250 may include a dog element 252, which comprises a blocking cutout 254 formed therein. The dimensions of the blocking cutout 254 allow a sequence of spaced-apart first blocking wedges 256 formed along the outer periphery of the circumference of the gear housing 172 to freely pass through this groove. See, for example, FIG. 12 and 13. A dog blocking wedge 258 is formed on the blocking dog 252 for blocking engagement with any of the first blocking wedges 256, as will be described in more detail below. As can also be seen in FIG. 8-11, the locking dog assembly 250 may further include a dog guide rod 260 that is slidably adapted to enter the opening 194 in the engine mounting area 192. The spring 262 of the dog is wound onto the guide rod 260 of the dog and is located between the dog element 252 and the engine mounting pad 192 so as to spring-cam the cam portion 264 of the dog element 252 to engage the third spur gear 140.

With reference to FIG. 8, 13, and 14, one method for controlling the retracting unit 120 and the drive unit lock system 240 will be described. In FIG. 13 shows a drive block locking system 240 in a locked position. As can be seen in this figure, the dog element 252 is displaced into the distal locking position by the dog spring 262. In this locked position, the dog blocking wedge 258 on the dog element 252 is in blocking engagement with one of the first of the first blocking wedges 256 on the gear housing 172. In this position, the retracting unit 120 is not engaged, and it is impossible to rotate the gear assembly 170 in the housing 12. Turning on the engine 100 by pressing the main power switch 80 (FIG. 1) rotates the drive tube 102 and ultimately axially extends the trigger a rod 104, which drives the drive rod 60 distally through the loading block 20.

If, for example, the drive rod 60 seizes in the fabric sandwiched in the loading block 20, or a power failure occurs on the engine 100, or for some other reason, the engine 100 is unable to change the direction of rotation of the drive tube 102 to ultimately retract trigger rod 104, a physician may use the retractor assembly 120 to manually retract the trigger rod 104 and the drive rod 60. In FIG. 8 illustrates a retracting unit 120 in an inactive position (i.e., if the drive unit lock system 240 is in the locked position). To start the manual retraction process, the doctor takes the retract lever 150 from the recess 14 for the lever in the handle housing 12 (in the R direction, see FIG. 6). Moving the retract lever 150 in the R direction causes the cam portion 154 of the retract lever 150 to rotate within the retract unit 124. This initial rotation of the retract lever 150 in the R direction causes the release cam 141 to engage with the cam engagement portion 264 of the dog element 252 to shift the dog element 252 to an unlocked position, thereby allowing the drive unit 186 to rotate freely inside the handle housing 12. The cam grooves 160 in the retraction unit are of sufficient length and are arranged so as to enable such a rotational movement of the cam portion 154 of the retraction lever 150 without first releasing the clutch unit 142. Thus, the cam grooves 160 may be longer than the cam grooves in the previously proposed retracting unit mounting arrangements, in order to facilitate unlocking of the drive unit assembly 186 before starting movements that cause the drive tube 102 to rotate. For example, in at least one embodiment, the cam grooves 160 may be elongated to allow the retraction lever 150 to rotate about fifteen degrees. As the doctor continues to rotate the retract lever 150 in the R direction, the cam engagement portion 264 will move along the outer circumference of the release cam 141 on the third spur gear 140. Further rotation of the retract lever 150 in the R direction will engage the cam elements 156 on the cam portion 154 with end portions of their respective cam grooves 160 to offset the cam portion 154 in a downward direction. This downward movement results in compression of the spring (s) located between the first and second engagement portions 144 and 146 to provide gear engagement of the teeth 148 located thereon. Further counterclockwise rotation of the cam portion 154 may cause movement overrunning clutch needle bearing, which is connected to the clutch and the first spindle. Continuous advancement of the retract lever 150 causes the clutch assembly 142 to rotate, which in turn rotates the spur gears 136, 138, 140 and the retract and drive gears 132 and 130. Thus, in turn, the drive tube 102 is rotated and the launch rod 104 is retracted.

The retracting lever 150 may be actuated for a predetermined amount of movement until the portion of the retracting lever 150 abuts against a portion of the housing 12. After this, the retracting lever 150 returns to its first position under the action of the return spring 162. In this operation, the cam section is lifted 152, which allows the second clutch portion 146 to also move up and out of engagement with the first clutch portion 144. The overrunning clutch needle bearing can release the clutch, thereby allowing the retract lever 150 to return to the first position without affecting the movement of the drive tube 102. After the retract lever 150 is returned to the first position, the drive unit 186 is again in the locked position. The use of a ratchet mechanism or the rotation of the retract lever 150 can be repeated many times until the trigger rod 104 returns to its desired position.

Since free rotation of the gear housing 172 is ensured during this rotational movement, the amount of torque needed to rotate the drive tube 102 and gears in the gear assembly 170 is significantly reduced compared to the torque needed for the previously used retraction assemblies to function. Such a mechanism also predominantly prevents the transmission of torque forces that are transmitted to the motor shaft 107 under the action of the retracting assembly, while the gear assembly 170 remains connected in a drive manner to the motor shaft 107. In other words, the gear assembly 170 may remain in the drive connection between the motor shaft 107 and the drive tube 102 during operation of the retract assembly 120. Such a mechanism differs from the retraction mechanisms described, for example, in US Pat. No. 7,959,050, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, but the use of which will result in physical disconnection or physical interruption of portions of the transmission chain when the retraction system is actuated.

In FIG. 15-18, another surgical instrument 310 is shown which is substantially similar to the surgical instrument 10 described above except for the differences described below. As shown in FIG. 16, tool 310 includes a gear assembly 470 that includes a gear housing 472 that can be coupled to engine 100, for example, as described above. The gear assembly 470 and the engine 100 may collectively be referred to as a “drive unit”, which is essentially referred to as member 486. The gear assembly 470 may be identical to the gear assembly 170 described above, except for the differences described below.

In at least one embodiment of the mechanism, the gear housing 472 may be rotatably mounted or may be integral with the motor stop portion 190 or otherwise fixed to the housing 12 without being rotated using various methods described herein. Since the drive unit 486 does not rotate at this location, it can be directly connected to the power source via wires. For example, power may be supplied to the engine 100 as described in Zemlok No. 763, or by other suitable methods. As shown in FIG. 16, the gear assembly 470 may include a planetary gear structure that is operatively coupled to an engine shaft 107. For example, in one embodiment, a fixed ring gear 473 may be formed on the inner surface of the gear housing 472. The leading Central gear 471 may be associated with the shaft 107 of the engine. The pinion gear 471 may be in gearing with a plurality of first planetary gears 475 that are mounted on the first planet carrier 474 of the planet gears. The first planetary gears 475 are also in gearing with a fixed ring gear 473. The first central gear 476 may be formed on the first planet carrier 474 of the planet gears and may be in gear engagement with a plurality of second planet gears 478 that are mounted on the second planet carrier of the planet gear 477. The second planetary gears 478 can also be in gearing with a fixed ring gear 473. The second central gear 479 can be formed or fixed on the second carrier 477 of planetary gears and can be in gearing with many third planetary gears 481 that are mounted on the third carrier 480 planetary gears. The third planetary gears 481 are in gearing with a fixed ring gear 473. The third central gear 483 may be formed or otherwise attached to the third carrier planetary gears 480. The third central gear 483 may be in gearing with a plurality of fourth planetary gears 487 that are coupled to an output shaft unit 484 that is rotatably mounted in a gear housing 472 on a bearing 185. A plurality of fourth planetary gears 487 may be in gearing with a lockable ring gear 485, which is mounted rotatably on gear housing 472. Gears 471, 473, 475, 476, 478, 479, 481, and 483 may be collectively referred to as a gear assembly 460.

Lockable ring gear 485 can be rotatably mounted in the annular cavity 490 in section 190 of the engine stop (FIG. 16). The size of the cavity 490 is selected in such a way as to allow free rotation within it of the locked ring gear 485 around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool. A lockable ring gear 485 may be mounted in the ring opening 490, and then its position is fixed by the locking element 492, which is inserted or otherwise blocked in the ring opening 490.

Surgical instrument 310 may further include a drive block locking system 540 that includes a movable ring assembly 542 configured to move. In at least one form, the movable ring assembly 542 may include, for example, a movable ring 543, which has at least one and preferably a plurality of locking elements, for example in the form of studs 544. The studs 544 protrude from the movable ring 543 and are configured to selectively lock engagement with a lock ring gear 485. Each of the lock studs 544 can be slidably received into a corresponding opening 546 in the locking member 492. Axial movement of the movable ring 5 42 is provided by a backstage 550, which is coupled to a clutch lock 560. As shown in FIG. 15, the clutch retainer 560 may include a spring retainer that is pressed against a portion of the outer circumference of the third spur gear 140. The clutch retainer 560 may have a hook 562 formed thereon that is connected to the shift bracket shaft 564. The shift bracket rod 564 may have some flexibility and may be rotatable with a movable ring 542. During normal operation (that is, when the trigger rod 104 is supplied by the engine 100), the locking studs 544 are locked in engagement with the locked ring gear 475, to prevent rotation of the locked ring gear 475 so that torque is transmitted to the output shaft unit 484 and ultimately to the drive tube 102.

If the doctor intends to use the retracting assembly 120 to retract the trigger rod 104, the retracting lever 150 is rotated from the starting position shown in FIG. 15, in the direction R. As the retract lever 150 rotates, the clutch lock 560 rotates with the third spur gear 140, thereby causing the shift bracket shaft 564 to move the movable ring 542 in the distal direction DD. In the process of moving the movable ring 542 in the distal direction DD, the locking studs 544 disengage from the locking engagement with the locked ring gear 485 to allow the locked ring gear 485 to rotate relative to the gear housing 472. The doctor continues to use the ratchet mechanism of the lever 150 retraction, translating it into the final position shown in FIG. 18. In at least one embodiment, the retractor lever 150, for example, needs to be rotated only about fifteen degrees to release the locking pins 544 from engagement with the lock ring gear 485. After the retractor lever 150 has been released by the doctor, the return spring 162 will return the retractor lever 150 to the starting position, and the doctor can repeat the procedure until the trigger rod 104 is retracted to the desired position. Since the lock ring gear 485 can rotate freely inside the bearing housing 472, rotation of the drive tube 102 and the output shaft unit 484 will not be prevented by other gear mechanisms in the gear assembly 470. Thus, the magnitude of the torque generated by the ratchet mechanism required to retract the trigger rod 104 is reduced compared to the retraction mechanisms that remain in functional engagement with the gear mechanisms in the gear assembly during the retraction process. Moreover, despite the reduction in the required torque, the start rod 104 may remain in functional engagement with the gear assembly 470. In other words, the starter rod 104 may remain operatively associated with the engine 100. If the movable ring 542 comes into contact with the bearing 185 on the engine mounting platform 192, the locking studs 544 engage in the locking engagement with the locked ring gear 485. The clutch lock 560 may be configured to the possibility of displacement relative to the third spur gear 140 after the movable ring comes into contact with the bearing 185 or other part of the platform 192 of the engine. Thus, the drive block locking system 540 serves to facilitate rotation of at least a portion of the drive block within the handle housing during the application of the return movements of the drive tube 102 to reduce the amount of return torque required to return the start rod 104.

 Shown in FIG. 19, the surgical instrument 610 is substantially identical to the surgical instrument 310, except that the clutch lock 560 is connected to the third spur gear 140 in such a way as to dispense with the use of the linkage 550, which is used in the surgical instrument 310. As can be seen, for example, in FIG. . 18, the shift bracket rod 564 is directly connected to the movable ring 542. The reciprocating movement of the retract lever 150, as described above, moves the movable ring 542 and engages and releases the locking pins 544 and the locked ring gear 485.

In FIG. 20 and 21, another surgical instrument 610 ′ is shown, which is substantially similar to surgical instrument 610 except for the differences described below. For example, in this embodiment of the mechanism, at least two leaf blocking springs 620 and ring gear blocking elements 622 are located on the gear housing 472 ′ of the gear assembly 470 ′. As can be seen in FIG. 20, each locking spring 620 and a corresponding locking element 622 are located in a groove 624 in the gear housing 472 ′. In such an embodiment of the mechanism, the locking pins 544 ', which are connected to the movable ring 542, are adapted to come into contact and press the corresponding locking spring 620 inward to act on the corresponding locking element 622 of the ring gear, translating it into locking engagement with the locking ring gear 485 In this position (shown in FIG. 20), it is not possible to rotate the locked ring gear 485 relative to the gear housing 472 '. If the shift bracket rod 564 feeds the movable ring 542 in the distal direction DD, the locking studs 544 'are released from engagement with their respective locking spring 620, which allows the spring 620 to bend back to its original position to allow the ring gear locking members 622 to disengage from a lockable ring gear 485, allowing it to rotate relative to the gear housing 472 '. Thus, when the retracting unit 120 is triggered, the lockable ring gear 485 can rotate freely relative to the gear housing 472 ′ to thereby reduce the amount of return torque needed to retract the trigger rod 104 in the proximal direction PD.

In FIG. 22-24 show another example of a retractor assembly mechanism for selectively manually retracting the distal portion of the trigger shaft of the surgical instrument 710 if the distal portion of the trigger shaft or other component of the surgical instrument with which it is operatively connected is stuck during operation, or there is a power failure for advancement of the launch rod assembly. In addition to the differences described below, the surgical instrument 710 in its construction and operation may be similar to the surgical instruments described above and / or described in Zemlok No. 763, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

As can be seen in FIG. 22-24, the surgical instrument 710 includes a housing 712 in which the trigger rod assembly 720 is functionally located. For example, an engine and a gear assembly (not shown) may be functionally housed in the housing 712 to communicate rotational motions to the drive tube, which may result in axial movement of the launch rod assembly 720 in various ways described herein. In at least one embodiment of the mechanism, the trigger rod assembly 720 may include a proximal trigger element or rod portion 722 that interacts with the drive tube in a variety of ways as described herein. In other embodiments of the surgical instrument mechanism, the proximal trigger rod portion 722 may functionally interact with other drive mechanisms and systems that are capable of applying axial movements to the trigger rod proximal portion 722.

As can additionally be seen in FIG. 22-24, the trigger rod assembly 720 may further include a distal trigger element or rod portion 724 that is operatively coupled to a proximal end movable along the axis of the drive rod 60 of the loading block 20 associated with it in various ways described herein . The retracting unit 730 in the form of a retracting traction unit 732 can be rotatably positioned between the proximal portion of the launch rod 722 and the distal portion 724 of the launch rod. In the above example of a mechanism, the retraction traction unit 732 includes a drive lever 734, which has a lever handle portion 736 that is mounted on a stud on the proximal portion of the launch rod 722. The retracting pulling unit 732 further includes a distal retracting lever 738, which is mounted on a stud to the actuating lever 734 and the distal portion 724 of the launch rod, as shown in the figure. In the above embodiment, the housing 712 includes a distal extending portion 714 of the hinge housing, which may also include a distal extending segment 716 of the shaft housing. The shaft housing segment 716 can serve to fix the axial pulling traction assembly 732 as it moves axially in the distal and proximal directions in response to the axial movement of the launch rod assembly 720. In order to provide axial movement of the pulling pull unit 732 relative to the shaft housing segment 716, the drive arm 734 passes through a groove 718 formed, as shown in the figure, in the shaft housing segment 716.

In FIG. 22 shows the position of the starter assembly 720 and the retractor assembly 730 before actuation. In FIG. 23 shows the position of the trigger rod assembly 720 and the retraction assembly 730 after actuation in the distal direction DD. If during the actuation the doctor needs to return the drive rod 60 back to its original position, he will just need to grab a portion 736 of the lever arm of the drive lever 734 and rotate it in the direction R, as shown in FIG. 24, wherein the distal portion 724 of the launch rod and the drive rod 60 move in the proximal direction PD. As shown in FIG. 22 and 23, during the actuation process, the proximal end 725 of the distal portion 724 of the launch rod can usually be spaced axially with the distal end 735 of the proximal section 734 of the launch rod by a distance designated RD. The distance RD may, for example, remain unchanged during the actuation and normal retraction of the launch rod assembly 720 using the drive unit. However, when the doctor engages the retraction unit, the distance between the proximal end 725 of the distal portion of the launch rod 724 and the distal end 735 of the proximal portion 734 of the launch rod (distance RD ') will be less than the distance RD. In addition, as can be seen in FIG. 22, the distance between the initial position of the distal working head 62 of the drive rod 60 and the final position of the distal working head 62 (i.e., after a full starting stroke) is defined as the distance FD. If desired, the distance RD can be large enough to provide the necessary retraction of the distal portion 724 of the launch rod (i.e., moving closer to the distal end 735 of the proximal section 722 of the launch rod) to return the working head 62 from its final position to its original position. In other words, the distal portion 724 of the launch rod can be retracted by a retraction distance that is at least equal to or greater than the starting distance FD. In this embodiment, for example, when the working head 65 is stuck or stopped in its final position for another reason, the actuation of the retracting unit can fully retract the drive rod 60 to return the distal working head 62 to its original position, while the distal working head 62 can allow the stop 22 to open when pivotally and release the fabric.

In FIG. 25-28, an example of an alternative embodiment of a launch rod assembly 720 ′, which can be selectively manually retracted, is presented. As shown in the figures, the launch rod assembly 720 ′ includes a proximal portion of the launch rod 722 ′ that can functionally interact with the drive tube in various ways described herein. In other embodiments of the surgical instrument mechanisms, the proximal trigger rod portion 722 ’may functionally interact with other drive mechanisms and systems that are capable of applying control motions to the proximal trigger shaft portion 722’. The launch rod assembly 720 ′ may also include a distal portion of the launch rod 724 ′, which is at least partially hollow and functionally connected to an end arranged to move along the axis of the drive rod 60 of the loading block 20, connected in various ways, described in this document. For example, the distal portion of the launch rod 724 'may have an opening 725 inside, the dimensions of which allow the distal section 724' of the launch rod to slide axially along the proximal portion 722 'of the launch rod over the retraction distance RDD. The retraction distance may be equal to or greater than the starting distance FD to allow the retracting unit 730 'to return the drive rod 60 to a sufficient distance to move its operating head 62 from the end position EP to the initial position SP. See FIG. 25. The retracting assembly 730 'may include a retracting latch 732'. The retracting latch 732 ′ may include a latch handle 735 that can move between the locked position (FIGS. 25 and 26) and the unlocked position (FIGS. 27 and 28). In the locked position, the retraction latch 732 'fixes the distal portion of the launch rod 724', preventing it from sliding along the axis along the proximal portion 722 'of the launch rod and the distal section 724' of the launch rod. In this position, the proximal portion 722 'of the launch rod is essentially moved by a single unit. Thus, in the locked position, the trigger rod assembly 720 ′ can be supplied in the distal direction DD to its end position EP, as shown in FIG. 26. If the drive rod 60 seizes or a power failure occurs or the power supply to the tool is interrupted during the starting stroke (or for other reasons), the doctor can simply move the retracting latch handle 735 to the unlocked position (FIG. 27), and then manually retract the retracting latch 732 ' in the proximal direction of the PD, as shown in FIG. 28.

The various retraction systems and mechanisms described herein eliminate a number of drawbacks that have often been encountered in previously used retraction mechanisms used to retract electrically driven drive elements in surgical end effectors. For example, the various retraction mechanisms described herein can facilitate the manual application of return movements to the drive elements and / or associated drive mechanisms without any counteraction typically occurring in gear / transmission mechanisms coupled to the engine, wherein the gears / transmissions remain coupled to the engine in a drive manner or physically.

Thus, in at least one example, a surgical instrument is considered, which may include a trigger element assembly, which may include a portion fixed for selective movement along the axis in the distal direction and the proximal direction. The tool may further include a drive unit that includes a motor including an engine shaft. The gear assembly can be connected in a drive way to the engine shaft and include an output shaft assembly that is configured to interact with the starting element assembly such that when the engine shaft is rotated in the first direction of rotation, the portion of the starting shaft assembly is driven axially in the distal direction, and when the motor shaft is rotated in the second direction of rotation, the portion of the starting element is driven axially in the proximal direction. The surgical instrument may further comprise a retraction assembly that cooperates with the trigger assembly to manually communicate other rotational movements to the trigger assembly in the second direction of rotation when the engine is turned off. The surgical instrument may further comprise a locking means that interacts with the retracting assembly and a drive unit to prevent other rotational movements from being transmitted to the motor shaft while the gear assembly remains connected in a drive manner to the motor shaft.

In accordance with another example, a surgical instrument may include a drive unit to provide starting and returning movements. The tool may further comprise a surgical end effector, which is configured to perform at least one surgical function in response to the application of at least one of the starting and returning movements. The surgical instrument may further comprise a trigger element assembly, which may include a proximal portion of the trigger element, which is in functional interaction with the drive unit and is configured to receive rotational trigger movements from it. The trigger element assembly may further comprise a distal portion of the trigger element, which is distally fixed on the proximal portion of the trigger element and is configured to transmit trigger and return movements to the surgical end effector. The retraction unit may be operatively connected to the proximal portion of the trigger element and the distal portion of the trigger element. The retracting unit may be arranged to selectively move between an inactive position, in which the retracting unit is configured to transmit starting and returning movements from the proximal portion of the trigger element to the distal portion of the trigger element, and an activated position in which the distal portion of the trigger element is axially moved relative to proximal portion of the trigger element.

Another example of a surgical instrument may comprise a handle housing in which an elongated shaft assembly is operatively associated with it. On the node of the elongated barrel can be fixed launch rod made with the possibility of movement along the axis. The loading block can be functionally connected with the elongated barrel and is made with the possibility of contact with the launch rod. The drive tube can be mounted rotatably in the handle housing and functionally contact with the launch rod. The surgical instrument may further comprise an engine that has an engine shaft. The engine can be functionally mounted in the handle housing and can be functionally connected to a power source. The gear assembly can be connected in a drive way to the motor shaft and include an output shaft assembly that is configured to interact with the drive tube so that when the engine shaft is rotated in the first direction of rotation, the drive tube drives the launch rod in the distal direction, and when the motor shaft is rotated in the second direction of rotation, the drive tube drives the launch rod in the proximal direction. The retraction unit can interact with the drive tube to apply other rotational movements manually in the second direction of rotation when the engine is turned off. The locking means may cooperate with the retracting assembly and the gear assembly to prevent other rotational movements from being transmitted to the engine shaft while the gear assembly remains coupled in a drive manner to the motor shaft.

As shown in FIG. 1-3, in various embodiments, the motor 100 of a surgical instrument 10 may be operatively coupled to a trigger element, such as trigger element 60, and may drive the trigger element 60 through an end effector or OZB 20 during the trigger stroke. For example, the trigger element 60 may dissect the fabric and / or install brackets in the fabric during the launch stroke. For example, the battery can supply current to the engine 100, and the current supplied to the engine 100 can determine the torque generated by the engine 100. Moreover, the torque created by the engine 100 can determine the starting force exerted by the starting element 60. The voltage on the motor for example, can determine the angular speed of rotation of the engine 100, which can determine the speed of movement of the trigger element 60. As shown in FIG. 63, the motor may determine a torque-voltage curve 5802. In various embodiments, the torque-voltage curve 5802 may have a maximum torque T ₁ at an optimized voltage V. At voltages that are, for example, above and / or below the optimized voltage V, the torque generated by the engine may be less than the maximum torque T ₁ . For example, at a voltage of 1/2 V, the torque-voltage curve 5802 may have a torque value T ₂ , which, for example, may be less than T ₁ .

In various embodiments, the control system, which is in signal communication with the engine, can supply current from the battery to the engine. In some embodiments, the control system may include a speed control control that can control, for example, the speed of the trigger. The control system may include, for example, a variable resistance circuit and / or a voltage control circuit that can control the current and / or voltage supplied to the motor. In such embodiments, the control system can control the torque and / or angular speed of the engine, and thus the starting force and / or speed of the starting element associated with the engine. For example, a voltage control circuit can control the voltage across the motor to influence the speed of the trigger element. As shown in FIG. 63, if the voltage control circuit reduces the voltage from the ideal value V to 1 / 2V, for example, the torque can be reduced to T ₂ , which may be less than the maximum torque T ₁ , and the speed, for example, can be adjusted to the value of S ₂ .

In various embodiments, the control system may include a pulse width modulation circuit, and the control system may supply current pulses to the motor. As shown primarily in FIG. 64 (a) to 65 (b), current pulses can be supplied at a constant voltage. In various embodiments, the pulse load cycle, i.e., the duration of the pulses during an interval or period, can affect the speed of the trigger element 5804. If the duty cycle duty cycle is higher (FIG. 64 (a)), each pulse can be a longer part of the interval, and, as a result, the engine can drive the starting element 5804, for example, at a higher speed S ₁ . If the duty cycle duty cycle is lower (FIG. 64 (b)), each pulse can be a shorter part of the interval, and, as a result, the motor can drive the trigger 5804, for example, at a lower speed S ₃ . In various embodiments, a pulse width modulation circuit may provide current pulses to a motor at an optimized motor voltage V (FIG. 63). In such embodiments, the speed of the starting element 5804 can be adjusted without reducing the torque generated by the engine. For example, the engine can operate at an optimized voltage value V to produce maximum torque T ₁ , and the trigger 5804 can, for example, be driven through the end effector at a reduced speed, for example, at a speed such as S ₃ , and / or any suitable speed by varying the width of the voltage pulses.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the battery may have a current-voltage limit or power limit. In other words, a battery can transmit a limited amount of energy per unit time. The battery power limit may be determined by the design of the battery and / or circuit. For example, thermal limitations of the battery and / or circuitry, such as, for example, heat capacity and / or insulation of wires, can affect the power limit. In addition, the battery power limit may limit the amount of current supplied to the motor. In various embodiments, the implementation of the engine using speed control controls, such as, for example, pulse width modulation, may not require the maximum current-voltage load of the battery. For example, if the battery delivers current pulses at the maximum or optimized voltage to actuate the starting element at the desired speed and maximum or optimized torque, additional current may not be used to drive the starting element. In such embodiments, additional current can be used to generate additional torque. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a) to 66 (c), the motor may include an additional or secondary set of coils, and additional current may be selectively applied to the additional set of coils to create additional torque. In such embodiments, an engine, for example, can produce higher torque values at lower speeds. In various embodiments, the control system can maximize the additional current supplied to the secondary set of coils, for example, depending on the current-voltage limit of the battery. In addition, in certain embodiments, the control system can optimize the torque generated by the engine during at least a portion of the starting stroke.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a) to 66 (c), the battery 6002 may selectively supply current to the engine 6004. The engine 6004 may, for example, include a primary coil kit 6006 and a secondary coil kit 6008. In various embodiments, a control system 6020 that is in signal communication with an engine 6004 can selectively direct current to a primary set of coils 6006 and / or to a secondary set of coils 6008. For example, control system 6020 may supply current to a primary coil set 6006 during a first operating state and may, for example, supply current to a primary coil set 6006 and a secondary coil set 6008 during a second operational state. In various embodiments, a switch, for example, such as a switch 6010, can be moved between an open position and a closed position to selectively supply current, for example, to a secondary set of coils 6008. In various embodiments, the kits 6006, 6008 of the coils can be activated independently. In addition, the control system 6020 may include a pulse width modulation circuit 6022, and the battery 6002 may supply current pulses to, for example, at least one set 6006, 6008 of coils. In various embodiments, a primary set of coils 6006 may be coupled to a first circuit 6030 (FIG. 66 (a)), and a second set of coils may be coupled to a second circuit 6032 (FIG. 66 (a)), which is independent of the first circuit 6030. In other embodiments, the primary and secondary sets of coils 6006, 6008 can be connected, for example, in parallel (FIG. 66 (b)) or in series (FIG. 66 (c)). In some embodiments, engine 6004 may, for example, include at least one additional set of primary coils and / or at least one additional set of secondary coils.

In various embodiments, the engine may generate a first torque value in a first operational state and a second torque value in a second operational state. The second magnitude of the torque, for example, may be greater than the first magnitude of the torque. Moreover, the additional torque generated by the secondary set of 6006 coils in the second operational state may prevent and / or limit the blocking of the starting element during the starting stroke. For example, as shown in FIG. 67, the motor may actuate the starter element distally during the first operating state and may actuate the starter element proximally during the second operational state. In various embodiments, the engine can generate a larger torque when the trigger is pulled in than when the trigger is pulled out. In such embodiments, retracting the trigger element may be more effective. When the trigger element seizes, for example, if the fabric is too thick and / or stiff to cut and / or staple with the trigger element, additional torque, for example, can be used to retract the trigger element. As shown in FIG. 66, the torque generated by the engine can gradually increase in the “soft start” phase 5902 of the starting stroke and / or can gradually decrease in the “soft” stop phase 5904, 5906 of the starting stroke. For example, when the starter element is pulled out, the engine can incrementally or slowly increase the start-up speed at the start of the start-up stroke and can incrementally or gradually decrease the start-up speed after the start-up element passes the start-up feed portion. Moreover, in various embodiments, the engine can instantly or substantially instantaneously generate maximum torque and / or speed when the trigger element is retracted. The engine can use an additional set of 6008 coils (FIG. 65 (a) to (c)) to achieve maximum torque generated, for example, at the beginning of retraction.

As shown in FIG. 68, the control system can control the movement of the launch element at a lower speed during the start speed limiting segment 5912. For example, when a trigger element is supplied, such a trigger element may initially move at a slower speed to ensure that the end effector suitable for the target tissue is correctly selected and / or positioned. In addition, as described in more detail herein, the surgeon can actuate an actuator, such as, for example, a switch or button, to turn on the engine and initiate the opening and closing of the end effector jaw, movement of the trigger element and / or articulation, for example boot block. The beginning of the speed limit segment, for example, such as speed limit segment 5912 shown in FIG. 68, with the actuator turned on and at the beginning of the engine-driven operation, it may allow the surgeon to “check” the surgical procedure to verify that the intended and / or appropriate surgical procedure has begun. For example, in some embodiments, the first button may include a motor-driven swivel rotation in a first direction, and the second button may include a motor-driven swivel rotation in a second direction. If the surgical instrument is rotated and / or oriented “upside down”, the position of the first and second buttons may be rotated and / or reversed compared to the standard arrangement viewed from the side of the operator. If the first direction is the selected swivel direction, it may be desirable to swivel the boot block in the first direction, i.e., so that the first button is actually pressed during the speed limiting segment. Similarly, if the second direction is the selected pivot direction, it may be desirable to pivot the boot unit in the second direction, i.e., so that the second button is pressed during the speed limit segment. In certain embodiments, the speed limiting segment during the initial part of the surgical procedure may provide the surgeon with sufficient time to modify and / or modify the surgical procedure if an undesired surgical procedure has been initiated. As described in more detail herein, a pulse width modulation scheme, such as, for example, a pulse width modulation scheme 6022, may provide for the execution of a speed limiting segment during the initial part of a surgical procedure.

As described above, the motor controller may be configured to use pulse width modulation to control the engine 6004. In various embodiments, the motor controller may use the same pulse width modulation, for example, for a primary set of 6006 coils and a secondary set of 6008 coils. In other embodiments, the engine controller may use a first pulse width modulation signal for the primary coil set 6006 and a second, or different, pulse width modulation signal for the secondary coil set 6008. In some cases, the motor controller may use a pulse width modulation signal for one of the sets of 6006, 6008 coils, but not for the other set of coils. Moreover, the information described herein can be adapted for motors having more than two sets of coils. For example, a motor controller may use multiple pulse width modulation signals to control multiple sets of coils.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the motor may be a driving brushless DC motor or, for example, a driving brushless DC motor. In some embodiments, the implementation of the motor may be a stepper motor, for example, such as a hybrid stepper motor. Stepper motors can provide rotation control so that there is no need to use an angle rotation sensor. Failure to use an angular rotation sensor may reduce costs and / or, for example, engine design complexity. As shown in FIG. 69 and 70, the motor may be a simplified stepper motor. For example, a motor may contain four electromagnetic poles spaced around the perimeter. As shown in FIG. 71-74 (c), the motor may be a hybrid stepper motor. A hybrid stepper motor may comprise permanent magnets and, for example, variable magnets.

The previously proposed surgical instrument designs described, for example, in Zemlok ‘763 and Zemlok‘ 344, used two separate motors. One engine, for example, is used to extend the drive element distally through the loading block, which leads to closing the stop, cutting the fabric and installing brackets from the cassette with brackets located in the loading block. Another motor is used to swivel the loading block around the articulation. Additional information regarding the engines used in the articulated rotation of the loading block is also presented in US patent No. 7,431,188, the full contents of which are fully incorporated herein by reference. The use of two engines in such devices can increase the level of complexity and increase the total cost of a surgical instrument. For example, this kind of design can double the number of retraction systems and other mechanisms that may cause failure. In the surgical instrument 810 described in FIG. 29-31, a single motor is used that can be selectively applied to trigger and swivel a surgical end effector, configured to perform at least one surgical intervention in response to triggering movements applied to it.

For example, in at least one form, many of the same components that have been used in various surgical instruments described in detail herein can be used in a surgical instrument 810. For example, a surgical instrument 810 includes a housing 12 in which a motor 100 is operatively located, which is configured to provide rotational triggering movements. The engine 100 is operatively coupled to a gear assembly 820, which has an associated drive connector assembly 840 that is selectively mounted and which will be described in more detail below. Surgical instrument 810 may further include a swivel system, which is essentially referred to as element 859 and is operatively associated with an elongated stem assembly to apply articulated swivel movements to the surgical end effector. For example, in one form, the swivel system 859 may include a swivel drive mechanism, generally referred to as element 860, which may be substantially similar to those swivel drive mechanisms described in Zemlok '763 and / or Zemlok' 344 and / or US patent No. 7,431,188, with the exception of the differences described below. For example, the housing 12 may include a cylindrical portion 90 that includes a rotating member 92 mounted thereon. The rotating member 92 may interact with the proximal end of the elongated barrel assembly to facilitate rotation of the elongated barrel assembly relative to the housing 12. The rotating member 92 may functionally fix the handle articulation and slip clutch mechanism as described in US Pat. No. 7,431,188. The main gear 94 of the articulated rotation of such a mechanism is represented by dashed lines in FIG. 29 and 30. The swivel main gear 94 may be coupled to the main shaft 95 via a slip clutch as described in the aforementioned US Pat. No. 7,431,188, so that turning the main swivel gear 94 will result in a corresponding rotation of the main shaft 95. As in more detail described herein, the articulated rotation handle may act as an indicator of the articulation position. The main shaft 95 is operatively associated with a J-shaped member 96, which is operatively associated with the proximal end of the articulated rod assembly 97. In one form, the articulated rod assembly 97 may comprise a proximal articulated rod 98, which cooperates with the articulated rod 70 (FIG. 3) in the loading unit 20.

The articulated rotation mechanism 860 may further include an articulated rotation drive mechanism 870 that is operatively engaged with the articulated rotation main gear 94 and the drive connector assembly 840. As can be seen in FIG. 29 and 30, the pivoting drive mechanism 870 may include a pivoting drive shaft 872 that is coupled to the output of the drive connector assembly 840, as will be described in more detail below. The first articulated pivot drive gear 873 is connected to the articulated pivot drive shaft and is in gear engagement with the central gear track 875 on the second articulated pivot gear 874, which is rotatably mounted on the rotating member 92. Consequently, pivoting the first articulated pivot drive gear 873 causes to the rotation of the second Central gear 874 transmission articulated rotation. As can also be seen in FIG. 29 and 30, the “third” gear 877 of the articulated rotation shaft is mounted on the second articulated rotation shaft 876, on which the “fourth” articulated rotation worm gear 878 is located. The third pivot pinion shaft gear 877 is in gear engagement with the second pivot pin gear 875 so that pivoting the first pivot pinion gear 873 ultimately pivots the third pivot pinion gear 877 and the second pivot pinch 876. The fourth articulated worm gear 878 is in gear engagement with the articulated main gear 94 so that the rotation of the fourth articulated worm gear 878 causes the main articulated gear 94 to rotate and ultimately transfers articulated movements to the articulated traction assembly 97. As will be described in more detail below, the articulated rotation drive shaft 872 is rotated by the engine 100 if the drive connector assembly 840 is in the articulated rotation control position.

As can be seen in FIG. 31, the engine 100 is operatively coupled to a gear assembly 820. The gear assembly 820 may include a gear housing 822 that is coupled to the engine 100. For example, the gear housing 822 may be coupled to the motor housing 101 by screws 103 or other mechanical fasteners and / or attachment mechanisms. The gear assembly 820 may include a planetary gear unit 821 that is operatively coupled to an engine shaft 107. For example, in one installation, an annular gear 823 may be formed on the inner surface of the gear housing 822. The leading Central gear 821 is connected with the shaft 107 of the engine. The driving center gear 821 is in gearing with a plurality of first planetary gears 825 that are mounted on the first planet carrier 824 of the planet gears so that they are also in gearing with the ring gear 823. The first center gear 826 is formed or otherwise fixed on the first carrier 824 planetary gears and is in gearing with the second planetary gears 828, which are mounted on the second carrier 827 planetary gears. The second planetary gears 828 are also fixed in gearing with the ring gear 823. The second central gear 829 is formed or otherwise fixed on the second planet carrier 827 and is in gearing with a plurality of third planetary gears 831. The third planetary gears 831 are on the third carrier 830 planetary gears and in gearing with an annular gear 823. The third central gear 833 is formed or otherwise fixed on the extension of the shaft 832 on the third planet carrier 830 planetary gears it is geared and gears with a plurality of fourth planetary gears 835, which are connected to a gear of a connector, which comprises a fourth carrier 834 of planetary gears, which is rotatably mounted on a shaft extension 832. In addition, the thrust bearing 836 can be mounted on an extension of the shaft 832 between the fourth planet carrier 834 planetary gears. Many of the fourth planetary gears 835 are in gear engagement with the output shaft unit 850, which is rotatably mounted on the gear housing 822. As can be seen in FIG. 30, a second thrust bearing 836 may be mounted between the fourth planetary gears and the output shaft unit 850. The fourth planetary gears 835 are in gearing with gear track 854.

In the above embodiments, the output shaft unit 850 is operatively coupled to a clutch 230 of this type and design as described in Zemlok No. 763, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Further details can be found in this publication regarding the design and operation of such a clutch 230. However, in an alternative embodiment, the clutch 230 may be replaced by a two-barrel connector or sleeve that serves to connect the output shaft unit 850 directly to the drive tube 102.

As shown in FIG. 31, the main gear 837 of the articulated rotation is connected to the drive shaft 872 of the articulated rotation and is in gear engagement with the outer gear ring 838 on the fourth carrier 834 planetary gears. In various forms, the coupling actuator assembly 840 may further include a selector connector element 842 that is movably coupled or otherwise mounted to move in a gear housing 822 or in another portion of the housing 812. In at least one design, the connector element 842 the selector may consist of a first portion 844 of the drive shaft limiter and a first portion 846 of the articulated shaft limiter. The first portion 844 of the drive shaft limiter comprises a corrugated, roughened, etc. surface that is capable of immobilizing the second portion 845 of the drive shaft limiter on the output shaft unit 850. Similarly, the first section 846 of the articulated rotation shaft limiter comprises a corrugated, rough, etc. surface that is capable of immobilizing the second portion 847 of the articulated rotation shaft limiter on the fourth planet carrier gear carrier 834.

The operation of the connector assembly 840 will be understood with reference to FIG. 29 and 30. As can be seen in FIG. 29, the selector coupler element 842 is rotated to the articulated position in which the first articulated shaft limiter portion 846 is in fixed engagement with the second articulated shaft limiter portion 847 on the output shaft unit 850. In this position, the rotation of the output shaft block 850 around the longitudinal axis of the LA-LA is blocked. Therefore, in this position, the engine 100 will rotate the third central gear 833, which is in gearing with the fourth planetary gears 835. Rotate the fourth planetary gears 835 will rotate the fourth planet carrier 834, which can rotate freely. This rotation of the fourth planet carrier 834 of the planetary gears will also lead to a rotation of the primary articulated rotation gear 837, which is connected to the articulated rotation drive shaft 872. Rotation of the articulated rotation drive shaft 872 will cause the first articulated rotation gear 873 to rotate and the second articulated rotation transmission gear 874 to move. Rotation of the second pivot gear 874 leads to the rotation of the third pivot gear and the fourth pivot worm gear 878. The rotation of the fourth articulated worm gear 878 will drive the main articulation gear 94 of the articulated rotation, which will cause the axial movements of the articulated rotation to be applied to the articulated traction arms 97, 70, which will ultimately cause the articulated rotation of the loading unit 20 around the articulation. Turning the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the first direction of rotation will cause the articulated rotation of the loading block in the first direction of articulation, and turning the drive shaft of the engine 107 in the opposite direction of rotation will cause articulation of the loading block in the second direction of articulation, which is opposite to the first direction of articulation.

As then shown in FIG. 30, the selector connector element 842 is rotated to the actuating or actuating position, in which the first portion 844 of the drive shaft limiter is in fixed engagement with the second portion 845 of the drive shaft limiter on the fourth planet carrier 834. In this position, the rotation of the fourth carrier 834 planetary gears around the longitudinal axis LA-LA is blocked. Therefore, in this position, the operation of the engine 100 will cause the third central gear 833 to rotate. The third central gear 833 is in gear engagement with the fourth planetary gears 835 mounted on the fourth planet carrier 834. Since the rotation of the fourth carrier 834 planetary gears is blocked due to the fixed engagement between the first articulated shaft limiter portion 846 of the articulated rotation and the second articulated shaft limiter portion 847 of the fourth planetary gear carrier 834, rotation of the fourth planetary gears 835 will cause the output shaft block 850 to rotate. The output shaft unit 850 may be coupled to the drive tube 102 via a clutch assembly 230 or via a direct connection. Therefore, the rotation of the output shaft unit 850 leads to the rotation of the drive tube 102. As described above, the rotation of the drive tube 102 results in axial movement of the starter rod (not shown in FIG. 31). Turning the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the first direction of rotation will cause the starter rod to be distally extended, and turning the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the opposite direction of rotation will cause a proximal movement of the launch rod. In various embodiments, closing the jaw of the loading block 20, for example, when the stop assembly 22 is rotated relative to the holder 24, can connect and / or disconnect the engine 100 to the swivel system and / or the trigger system of the surgical instrument 10. For example, closing the stop assembly 22 with respect to the holder 24 may disconnect the engine 100 from the articulation system, for example, from the articulated rotation drive shaft 872, and may connect the engine 100 to the starter system, for example, to the output shaft unit 850. Moreover, the opening of the stop assembly 22 relative to the holder 24 can disconnect the engine 100 from the starting system and can connect the engine 100 to the swivel system. In such embodiments, the engine 100 can affect the articulated rotation of the loading block 20 if the loading block 20 is in the open state, and the engine 100 can affect the starting stroke of the starting rod if the loading block 20 is in the closed state. Surgical instrument 10 may, for example, comprise a sensor and / or selector. In some embodiments, the sensor may detect closing of the jaw of the loading unit 20. Moreover, the sensor may be in signal communication with a selector, for example, selector connector element 842. The selector can connect and / or disconnect the engine 100 from the swivel system and / or the starting system when opening and / or closing the stop assembly 22 relative to, for example, the holder 24. Various powered surgical instruments using various drive connector mechanisms described in This document can be a significant improvement over previously offered surgical instruments with power, which use many motors for articulated rotation and the end effector and actuation of the drive element of the end effector.

For example, at least one surgical instrument comprises an elongated shaft assembly that defines the longitudinal axis of the instrument. A surgical end effector may be operatively connected to an elongated stem assembly for selective articulation with respect to it. A surgical end effector may be configured to perform at least one surgical intervention in response to triggering movements applied to it. The swivel system can functionally interact with the elongated stem assembly to apply swivel movements to the surgical end effector. The trigger element assembly may functionally cooperate with the elongated barrel assembly to apply trigger movements to the surgical end effector. The surgical instrument may further comprise an engine that is configured to create rotational triggering movements. The drive connector assembly can interact with the engine and the swivel system so that if the drive connector assembly is in the first configuration, the motor will apply triggering movements to the swivel system, causing the surgical end effector to swivel relative to the longitudinal axis of the instrument, and if the connector assembly the drive is in the second configuration, the engine will apply the starting movements to the node of the starting element, forcing the node of the starting element of the butt call at least one of the triggering movements to the surgical end effector.

Another example of a surgical instrument may comprise a handle in which an elongated shaft assembly is operatively associated with it, defining the longitudinal axis of the instrument. The boot block can be functionally connected with the node of the elongated trunk and is configured to cut and stitch the fabric with brackets in response to the starting movements applied to it. The loading block can be made with the possibility of selective articulation about the longitudinal axis of the tool around the articulation. The surgical instrument may further comprise a swivel system, which comprises an articulated pivot rod assembly mounted on an elongated barrel assembly and operable to interact with the articulated portion in one element of the elongated barrel assembly and loading block. The articulated rotation drive mechanism can be mounted on the handle and interact with the articulated rotation traction assembly to apply articulated rotation movements to it. The surgical instrument may further comprise a trigger element assembly that is operatively associated with the loading block to apply trigger movements to it. The engine can be functionally mounted in the handles and can be configured to provide rotational starting movements. The drive connector assembly can come into contact with the motor and the articulated pivot drive so that, if the drive connector assembly is in the first configuration, the motor will apply triggering movements to the articulated joint system, which causes the artificially rotated loading block relative to the longitudinal axis of the tool, and if the drive connector assembly is in a second configuration, the engine will report the starting movements to the trigger assembly, causing the trigger assembly to apply at least at least one of the starting movements to the loading block.

In yet another example, a surgical instrument may comprise an elongated stem assembly that defines the longitudinal axis of the instrument. A surgical end effector may be operatively connected to an elongated stem assembly for selective articulation with respect to it. A surgical end effector may be configured to perform at least one surgical intervention in response to triggering movements applied to it. The swivel system can functionally interact with the elongated stem assembly to apply swivel movements to the surgical end effector. The trigger element assembly may functionally cooperate with the elongated barrel assembly to apply trigger movements to the surgical end effector. The engine may be configured to create rotational starting movements. The surgical instrument may further comprise means for selectively applying the output movement from the engine to each element of the swivel system and the trigger element assembly.

In some electrically powered surgical instruments, the motor may provide tactile feedback to the surgical instrument operator. For example, the rotation of the engine may create vibrational motion or noise, which, for example, may depend on the direction and / or speed of rotation of the engine. However, various types of motors can create minimal noise, and thus, tactile feedback with the surgeon may be limited, and / or the surgeon may simply not perceive it. For example, various modifications and / or improvements to the engine and / or transmission design may reduce the tactile noise generated by the engine and / or transmission. In such embodiments, it may be preferable to modify the engine and / or gear assembly operably coupled to the engine to create artificial and / or deliberate tactile feedback and / or other sensory feedback. In some embodiments, the surgical instrument may provide feedback to the surgeon, and the surgeon does not need to take his eyes off the surgical field. For example, the engine and / or gear may provide tactile and / or audible feedback to transmit information to the surgeon. In such embodiments, the operator does not need to look at the display device, for example, to verify that the surgical instrument is in good condition or otherwise. As described in more detail herein, a surgical instrument can transmit information about the direction of rotation of the engine, for example, which may correspond to the direction of operation of the trigger element and / or, for example, the direction of articulation of the loading block. In addition, or alternatively, the surgical instrument can transmit information about the speed and / or position of the trigger element, for example, during the trigger stroke, and / or about the speed and / or degrees of the angle, for example, the articulation of the loading block.

 In various embodiments, as described in more detail herein, the engine may be operatively coupled to a launch assembly and / or hinge assembly. As shown in FIG. 168, an engine 7010 may drive an engine shaft 7014, which, for example, may engage with a gear assembly 7020. In various embodiments, a key, such as a key 7016 on an engine shaft 7014, may engage with a portion of a gear assembly 7020. In some embodiments, for example, the gear assembly 7020 may include discs 7022, 7024, the design of which may allow them to rotate or spin with the motor shaft 7014 when engaged with it by means of a wrench. For example, the first disk 7022 may include a groove (not shown). In addition, a first key (not shown) extending from the motor shaft 7014 may engage with a groove on the first disc 7022 so that the first disc 7022 rotates clockwise (CW) if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in the CW direction, and rotates counterclockwise (CCW) if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in the CCW direction. In at least one embodiment, the first key may remain engaged with a groove in the first disk 7022 throughout the operation of the surgical instrument and / or its motor.

In some embodiments, the first disc 7022 may be balanced about its pivot axis with the motor shaft 7014. As shown in FIG. 168, a weight, for example, such as a weight 7026, may extend from the first disk 7022 and may shift the center of gravity of the first disk 7022 from the axis of rotation of the first disk 7022. For example, the weight 7026 may extend away from the motor shaft 7014 and / or away from the outer perimeter of the first disk 7022. In other words, the weight 7026 can upset the balance of the first disk 7022, cause a rotational imbalance of the first disk 7022 and thereby create centrifugal force when the first disk 7022 rotates with the motor shaft 7014. Therefore, the rotation of the first disk 7022 and the weight 7026 can provide tactile feedback, for example, such as vibration or beating of a surgical instrument body and / or handle. Tactile feedback may correspond to the operating condition or operating conditions of the surgical instrument. Moreover, the tactile feedback generated by the rotation of the first disk 7022 and the weight 7026 may depend on the rotation speed of the motor shaft 7014. In such embodiments, the starting speed and / or articulation speed may also, for example, be transmitted to the surgeon. For example, the first disc 7022 may provide tactile feedback with a higher frequency if the motor shaft 7014 rotates faster, and with a lower frequency if the motor shaft 7014 rotates more slowly.

 Similarly to the first disc 7022, in some embodiments, the second disc 7024 may be balanced about its pivot axis with the motor shaft 7014. As shown in FIG. 168, a weight, for example, such as a weight 7028, may extend from the second disk 7024 and may shift its center of gravity. For example, the weight 7028 may extend away from the motor shaft 7014 and / or away from the outer perimeter of the second disk 7024. In other words, the weight 7028 may upset the balance of the second disk 7024, cause a rotational imbalance of the second disk 7024, and thus create a centrifugal force when turning the second disk 7024 with the shaft 7014 of the engine. Therefore, the rotation of the second disk 7024 and the weight 7028 can provide tactile feedback, such as, for example, vibration or beating of the body of a surgical instrument and / or handle. Tactile feedback may correspond to the operating condition or operating conditions of the surgical instrument. Moreover, the tactile feedback created by the rotation of the second disk 7024 and the weight 7028 may depend on the rotation speed of the motor shaft 7014. In such embodiments, the starting speed and / or articulation speed may also, for example, be transmitted to the surgeon. In various embodiments, the first and / or second discs 7022, 7024 may include additional weights, for example, similar to weights 7026 and / or 7028, which can further contribute to the formation of a tactile response, for example, the body of a surgical instrument and / or handle. Moreover, in some embodiments, the motor shaft 7014 may be operatively associated with additional and / or other disks of the gear assembly 7120 to selectively generate additional and / or other tactile feedback.

As shown in FIG. 168, the second disk 7024 may include an inner perimeter 7026. In various embodiments, the second key 7016 may extend from the motor shaft 7014 and may be operatively engaged with the second disk 7024 via the inner perimeter 7030. The inner perimeter 7030 may, for example, comprise a plurality of planar surfaces 7032 and a plurality of arched surfaces 7034 between adjacent planar surfaces 7032. Each pair of planar and arched surfaces 7032, 7034 may define a groove whose structure can provide the second key 7016. In some embodiments, when the key 7016 is rotated in the first direction, this key 7016 can abut against a flat surface 7032 and be fixed and / or held in the groove of the second disk 7024. In this design, the second disk 7024 can rotate in the first direction together with motor shaft 7014. Moreover, in some embodiments, when the key 7016 is rotated in a second direction opposite to the first direction, the key 7016 can be rotated passing arched surfaces 7034 and can be locked and / or held in the grooves of the inner perimeter 7030. In other words, the key 7016 can be rotated relative to the second disk 7024. In this design, the motor shaft 7014 can rotate in a second direction relative to the second disk 7024. Accordingly, the key 7016 can engage with the second disk 7024 and forced Only the second disk 7024 rotates if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in the first direction. In some embodiments, the CW direction may correspond to the first direction, and in other embodiments, the CCW direction may correspond to the first direction.

As described herein, since the engagement of the second disk 7024 may depend on the direction of rotation of the engine shaft 7014, the second disk 7024 can only be rotated if the engine shaft 7014 rotates in one direction, for example, if the motor 7010 drives the starting element in one direction and / or rotates the loading unit in one direction. For example, the second disc 7024 can rotate only if the motor 7010 pulls in the trigger, or, for example, rotates the loading block in the direction of CW. Such selective engagement of the second disc 7024 may affect the tactile feedback generated by the surgical instrument. In other words, a different and / or more tangible level of tactile feedback can be achieved by selectively engaging the second disk 7024. For example, in those embodiments where the second disk 7024 is rotated only when the motor 7010 is rotated to retract the trigger element, the process of retraction can form a more tangible tactile feedback than in the process of extension of the trigger element. During retraction, the second disc 7024 can also contribute to the formation of tactile feedback, which can lead to a greater or substantially greater summation of the feedback forces. In such embodiments, the more palpable tactile feedback provided by the first and second discs 7022, 7024 may inform the surgeon that the trigger element is being retracted by the motor 7010. In light of the above, in various embodiments, the first disc 7022 can rotate only if if the motor shaft 7014 is rotated in one direction, and both discs 7022, 7024 can rotate if the motor shaft 7014 is rotated in the opposite direction. Thus, discs 7022, 7024 can provide various feedback if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in opposite directions.

As shown in FIG. 169, in some embodiments, the engine 7010 may drive a motor shaft 7014 that may engage with a gear assembly 7120. In various embodiments, a key, such as a key 7016 on an engine shaft 7014, may engage with a gear assembly 7120. Similar to the gear assembly 7020, the gear assembly 7120 may include a plurality of discs, for example, a first disc 7122 and a second disc 7124. The design of the first and second discs 7122, 7124 may allow them to rotate or rotate with the motor shaft 7014 when selectively engaged with it by the key. For example, the first disk 7122 may include a groove (not shown). In addition, a first key (not shown) extending from the engine shaft 7014 may engage with a groove on the first disk 7122 so that the first disk 7122 rotates with the engine shaft 7014. In some embodiments, during use, the first key may not disengage from the groove of the first disk 7122. The second disk 7124 may include an inner perimeter 7130 similarly to, for example, the inner perimeter 7030 of the second disk 7024. The inner perimeter 7130 may contain many flat surfaces 7132 and many arcuate surfaces 7134. As described herein for FIG. 168, the key 7016 may selectively engage and disengage from the inner perimeter 7130 of the second disk 7124 depending on the direction of rotation of the motor shaft 7014. For example, if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in the first direction, the key 7016 may engage with the second disc 7124, causing the second disc 7124 to rotate with the motor shaft 7014. In addition, when the motor shaft 7014 is rotated in the second direction, the key 7016 can remain disengaged from the second disk so that the key 7016 can rotate relative to the second disk 7024 inside its inner perimeter 7130.

In various embodiments, the first disk 7122 may include at least one tooth 7126, and the second disk 7124 may also include at least one tooth 7128. When the disks 7122, 7124 are turned, the teeth 7126, 7128 can touch elements of the generator 7140 sound feedback. For example, prongs 7126, 7128 can be clicked by clickers 7142, 7144 of the audio feedback generator 7140. In various embodiments, the prong or prongs 7126 of the first disk 7122 can touch and reject the first clicker 7142 when the first disk 7122 is rotated, and the prong or prongs 7128 of the second disk 7124 can touch and reject the second clicker 7144 when the second disk 7124 is rotated. 7144 may cause resonant vibrations of clickers 7142, 7144 and the formation of an acoustic signal. In other words, the rotation of the first and second discs 7122 can create audio feedback. Moreover, the rotation speed of the rotary disks 7122, 7124 and / or the number and placement of teeth passing from the first and second disks 7122, 7124, can affect the frequency of the acoustic signal. For example, in such embodiments, the engine speed and the corresponding starting speed of the starting element and / or the articulated speed of the loading block can be felt by the surgeon.

As shown primarily in FIG. 170 and 171, the geometrical parameters of the teeth 7126, 7128 can affect the acoustic signals that are generated by the sound feedback generator 7140. For example, each of the teeth 7126, 7128 may comprise a non-damping surface 7150 and a damping surface 7152. The non-damping surface 7152 may, for example, include a flat surface, and the damping surface 7152 may, for example, include an arched surface. In various embodiments, if the non-damping surface 7150 of the tooth 7126 during rotation is preceded by the damping surface 7152 of the tooth 7126 (FIG. 170), the resonant vibrations of the clicker 7142 can be damped and / or stopped by the damping surface 7152 of the tooth 7126 that follows. can come into contact with the rejected clicker 7126 to prevent and / or limit the vibrations or resonance of the clicker 7126. On the contrary, if the damping surface 7152 of the prong 7126 rotates there is a non-damping surface 7150 of tooth 7126 (FIG. 171), the resonant vibrations of the clicker 7142 will not be damped by the non-damping surface 7150 of tooth 7126. For example, the flat geometry of the non-damping surface 7150 can move away from contact and / or limit contact with the rejected clicker 7126 so that opportunities are created and / or restrictions are reduced for the resonant vibrations of the clicker 7126. In other words, the direction of rotation of the discs 7122, 1724 and corresponding teeth 7126, 7128 can affect the acoustic feedback generated by urgicheskim tool. Accordingly, the operator of the surgical instrument can obtain information about the operating state of the surgical instrument during its use, and the surgeon does not need to take his eyes off the surgical field. For example, sound signals may be damped when the trigger element is retracted and may not be damped when the trigger element is pulled out. In other embodiments, the audio signals may be damped when the trigger element is pulled out and may not be damped when the trigger element is pulled in. Moreover, in some embodiments, damped acoustic signals may correspond to articulated rotation of the loading block in one direction, and non-damped acoustic signals may correspond to, for example, articulated rotation of the loading block in the other direction. In various embodiments, at least one sound feedback generator may be used alone and / or in combination with at least one tactile feedback system. Moreover, in some embodiments, at least one tactile feedback system may be used alone and / or in combination with at least one sound feedback generator. Sound and tactile feedback can inform the surgeon about different working conditions and / or, for example, provide the surgeon with duplicate feedback regarding such working conditions.

 In various embodiments, the surgical instrument may generate feedback if the trigger approaches the end and / or reaches the end of the trigger and / or if the loading block approaches the limit of articulation and / or reaches such a limit. In various embodiments, such feedback may differ and / or complement the feedback generated during the start-up stroke and / or when the loading block is pivotally rotated. Accordingly, the surgical instrument can inform the operator that the starting stroke, for example, is nearing completion and / or completed, and / or can inform the operator that the loading unit is approaching the limit of articulated rotation and / or has reached the limit of articulated rotation.

As shown in FIG. 172, the engine 7010 and the motor shaft 7014 may be operatively engaged with the articulated gear assembly 7120, as described in more detail below. Moreover, the discs 7122, 7124 of the gear assembly 7120 may come into contact with the sound feedback generator 7240, which may, for example, be similar to the sound feedback generator 7140. For example, prongs 7126, 7128 on discs 7122, 7124 can reject clickers 7242, 7244 of sound feedback generator 7240, causing clickers 7242, 7244 to resonate and create acoustic feedback. In addition, the sound feedback generator 7240 may move or progressively move relative to the gear assembly 7120. As described in more detail below, the sound feedback generator 7240 may selectively engage and / or disengage with clickers 7242, 7244 on discs 7122, 7124 to selectively generate acoustic signals. In other embodiments, the engine, gear assembly, and / or its disks can be moved so that the teeth on the disks selectively enter and / or disengage from the clickers of the sound feedback generator to selectively generate acoustic signals.

In various embodiments, the sound feedback generator 7240 may progressively move within the surgical instrument as the trigger moves during the trigger stroke. For example, at the start of the start-up stroke, the sound feedback generator a7240 can be offset relative to the teeth 7126, 7128 of the discs 7122, 7124. Moreover, as the start-up element moves distally and / or approaches the end of the start-up stroke, the sound feedback generator 7240 can move to the combined position relative to the teeth 7126, 7128 of the discs 7122, 7124 and / or in this position. In such embodiments, the sound feedback generator 7240 may provide acoustic feedback if the trigger is approaching the end of the trigger and / or reaches the end of the trigger. As shown, for example, in FIG. 173, the feedback generator may generate feedback if the trigger is in a range of positions near and / or at the end of the trigger, for example, to inform the surgeon about the position of the trigger. In such embodiments, the surgical instrument may inform the surgeon of the completion of the trigger. For example, as shown in FIG. 172, at least one prong 7126, 7128 can be aligned with at least one clicker 7242, 7244 as the trigger approaches the distal end of the trigger. At this point in time, the surgical instrument can generate feedback so that it can inform the surgeon of the position of the trigger element. If each tooth 7126, 7128 is combined with one of the clickers 7242, 7242, more tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. Moreover, when the trigger is pulled in, at least one tooth 7126, 7128 can again go out of alignment with the clicker 7242, 7244 so that less tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. Accordingly, as the feedback generator moves during the start-up stroke, the feedback generator can transmit various kinds of feedback to the operator depending on the position of the trigger element. Moreover, the gear assembly 7120 may include additional disks and / or teeth that may enter and / or disengage from the sound feedback generator 7240, and / or the sound feedback generator 7240 may include additional clickers, which may enter and / or disengage with teeth. In various embodiments, the sound feedback generator may inform the surgeon of alternative and / or additional positions of the trigger element. For example, an audio feedback generator may transmit acoustic feedback at a midpoint and / or at points of stepwise movement along the length of the launch path and / or retraction path.

As shown in FIG. 174 and 175, a feedback generator configured to move can also be used to inform the surgeon of the articulated rotation limit of the loading unit. For example, the sound feedback generator 7240 shown in FIG. 172, for example, can progressively move by swiveling the boot block. For example, if the boot block is in a configuration without pivoting, the sound feedback generator 7240 may be offset relative to the teeth 7126, 7128 of the discs 7122, 7124. Moreover, as the boot block is pivotally rotated, the sound feedback generator 7240 may move to a aligned position with respect to teeth 7126, 7128 discs 7122, 7124 and / or in this position. In such embodiments, the sound feedback generator 7240 may provide acoustic feedback if the loading unit approaches the articulation limit and / or reaches the articulation limit. For example, as shown in FIG. 174 and 175, the feedback generator may generate feedback if the trigger is in a range of positions near and / or at the end of the trigger, for example, to inform the surgeon about the position of the trigger. In such embodiments, the surgical instrument may inform the surgeon of the articulation limit. For example, as shown in FIG. 172, at least one prong 7126, 7128 can be aligned with at least one clicker 7242, 7244 as the loading unit approaches its articulation limit, for example, approaches forty-five degrees. At this point in time, the surgical instrument can generate feedback so that it can inform the surgeon of the position of the trigger element. If the loading unit approaches and / or reaches the limit of articulated rotation, each tooth 7126, 7128 can be combined with one of the clickers 7242, 7244, and more tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. In addition, when the loading block is pivotally rotated to the neutral position without pivoting, at least one tooth 7126, 7128 can again go out of alignment with the clicker 7242, 7244 so that less tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. Accordingly, as the feedback generator moves during the start-up stroke, the feedback generator can transmit various kinds of feedback to the operator, depending on the configuration of the loading unit.

In various embodiments, it may be preferable to protect certain components of the surgical instrument from contact with liquids. For example, accidental contact with body fluids during use can damage the surgical instrument and may limit and / or shorten the life of the surgical instrument. Moreover, it may be preferable to protect certain components of the surgical instrument from contact with liquids during the sterilization process. For example, accidental contact with sterilizing and / or cleaning fluids can damage the surgical instrument and may impede and / or limit the reuse of the surgical instrument. In various embodiments, certain components of a surgical instrument may be sealed and / or protected from contact with liquids. For example, the electronic components of a surgical instrument can be cast into epoxy to protect against liquids. The movable components of the surgical instrument, such as, for example, sections of the engine and / or gear assembly, can also be sealed and / or protected from contact with the fluid. Such sealing, for example, may allow rotation of various movable components. Moreover, in various embodiments, such a seal may also facilitate heat transfer so that the heat generated during operation of the surgical instrument is dissipated with greater efficiency.

As shown in FIG. 185 and 186, in some embodiments, the engine 7510 and / or gear assembly 7520 may be sealed and / or protected against liquids during use and / or sterilization. The engine 7510, for example, may be similar to the engine 100, and the gear assembly 7520, for example, may be similar to the gear assembly 170. To seal and protect the engine 7510 around the engine 7510, for example, an engine housing, such as, for example, a rubber sleeve, can be placed inside the housing 12 (FIG. 1) of the surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1). Such a rubber sleeve may limit heat transfer from the engine 7510, and the engine 7510 may be subject to overheating. In other embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 185 and 186, the engine housing, for example, may comprise a double leaf cover 7516, which may be located around the engine 7510. In various embodiments, the double leaf cover 7516 may include at least two sections that may be connected by hinges and / or, for example, to be latched. The double-leaf cover 7516 can provide rotation of the engine 7510 and / or the motor shaft. In addition, in some embodiments, a double leaf cover 7516 may facilitate heat transfer from an engine 7510 enclosed within the cover. The contact system 7512 (FIG. 186), similar to the contact system 210, for example, can be used to supply electric current to the motor 7510. The contact system 7512 may include positive and negative ring contacts 7514a, 7514b (FIG. 186), which, for example , can functionally connect to the fixed positive and negative contacts 7518a, 7518b (FIG. 186), for example, located on the bicuspid cover 7516. Moreover, the bicuspid cover 7516 may include an o-ring or gasket 7519, which may, for example For example, tighten the perimeter of the engine 7510 and seal the engine 7510 and the contact system 7512 inside the bicuspid cover 7516. In some embodiments, the bicuspid cover 7516 may contain metallic material, which, for example, may facilitate heat transfer from the engine 7510 and may prevent overheating and / or engine breakdown. 7410.

As shown in FIG. 185 and 186, the gear assembly 7520 may be sealed and / or protected against liquids during application and / or sterilization treatment. For example, a gasket 7522 may be located between the engine 7510 and the housing of the gear assembly 7520 so that the engine 7510 and the gear assembly 7520 form a tight, watertight seal. In addition, the sealing sleeve 7530 may be placed around the housing of the gear assembly 7520. The sealing sleeve 7530 may include an edge 7536, which can abut against the double leaf cover 7516 and / or the motor 7510 to provide a tight waterproof seal between them. The sealing sleeve 7530 may also include an opening 7532 for the output shaft 7524. For example, the output shaft 7524 of the gear assembly 7520 can pass through the hole 7532 and the ribs 7534 can pass to the output shaft 7524 to provide a tight waterproof seal while allowing the output to rotate. the shaft 7524 inside the bore 7532. In various embodiments, the sealing sleeve 7530 and / or the edges 7536, gaskets and / or its ribs 7534 may contain rubber and / or other suitable material to form a tight seal onepronitsaemogo seal. In various embodiments, an engine mounting bracket or stop 7540, for example, similar to stop 190, can hold the sealed gear assembly 7520 and engine 7510 inside the body 12 (FIG. 1) of the surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1).

In FIG. 32-37 presents another example of a surgical instrument 910, which may include many of the components of other surgical instruments described herein. In at least one form, the surgical instrument 910 may include an articulated pivot drive mechanism, generally referred to as member 860, which may be substantially similar to those articulated pivot drives described in Zemlok '763 and / or Zemlok' 344 and / or US patent No. 7,431,188, with the exception of the differences described below. In other configurations, a surgical instrument may include various forms of other articulated pivot drive mechanisms that are described herein. As can be seen in FIG. 32, the tool 910 includes a housing 12, which may include a cylindrical mounting portion 90 on which the rotating member 92 is mounted. The rotating member 92 is in contact with the proximal end of the elongated barrel assembly 16 to rotate the elongated barrel assembly 16 relative to the housing 12. This arrangement allows the physician to selectively rotate the elongated shaft assembly 16 and the associated loading block 20 (or other form of surgical end effector) around the longitudinal axis of the LA-LA instrument. The rotating member 92 may be fixedly mounted on the cylindrical portion 90, or its design may provide for the possibility of its selective detachment.

As described herein, depending on the type and / or design of the surgical end effector used, it may be desirable to supply an electric current to the end effector. For example, in the end effector, sensor (s), backlight, actuator (s), etc., for which operation requires power supply, can (can) be used. However, in such constructions, the ability to rotate the surgical end effector around the longitudinal axis of the LA-LA instrument can be severely limited, since the system of conductors that transmit power to the surgical end effector or loading block through an elongated shaft from the power supply can twist and be seriously damaged - in particular, in cases where the elongated barrel is rotated more than one revolution. In various surgical instruments described herein, a conductor control system, essentially referred to as element 930, can be used to eliminate such problems.

 As shown in FIG. 32, the surgical instrument 910 may receive power from a power source 200. The power source may be, for example, of the type described in more detail in Zemlok publication No. 763. For example, the power supply 200 may include a rechargeable battery (e.g., a lead, nickel, lithium-ion, etc.). It is also contemplated that the power source 200 may include at least one disposable battery. In at least one design, the voltage of a disposable battery may, for example, be from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. In FIG. 32 shows one example in which the power supply 200 includes a plurality of battery cells 202. The number of battery cells used may depend on the needs of the current load of the tool 910. It is also conceivable that the power supply may comprise an AC source available in the operating room. For example, a power cord and an external power connector (not shown) can be used to supply alternating current from an outlet in the operating room to various components, conductors, sensors, switches, circuits, etc., in the case of the surgical instrument and / or end effector. In other applications, the surgical instrument 910 may receive power from, for example, a robotic system to which it is connected or otherwise connected.

As can be seen in FIG. 32, the conductor control system 930 may comprise a primary conductive element or wire 932 that is coupled or otherwise interacts with the power source 200 to receive power from it. The primary conductive element 932 is connected to a spiral, bobbin and / or conductor winding assembly 934, which is secured within the rotating member 92. In one design, for example, a spiral conductor assembly 934 may be formed or may otherwise comprise a flat conductor 936 that is helically wound as shown, for example, in FIG. 36 and 37. For example, the spiral conductor assembly 934 may be formed from a spirally wound conductor, which may have the same characteristics as a spirally wound spring, such as, for example, a torsion spring. In one form, conductor 936 may, for example, be wound in successive turns or turns, as shown in FIG. 36 and 37. In various designs, conductor 936 may be wound by one or more full turns. For example, conductor 936 shown in FIG. 36 and 37, is configured to perform more than four full revolutions.

In various forms, conductor 936 has a first end 938, which can, for example, be fixed on the cylindrical part 90 of the housing 12. In addition, conductor 936 further has a second end 940, which is fixed or otherwise connected to the rotary element 92 for rotational movement together with him. Thus, when the rotating member 92 is rotated in the first direction of rotation around the cylindrical portion 90, the spirally wound conductor 936 is wound in a more dense manner. Conversely, by rotating the rotary member 92 in the second direction of rotation, the winding density of the spirally wound conductor 936 can be weakened. In those configurations where the rotatable member 92 is removably mounted on the cylindrical part 90, the first end 938 of the spirally wound conductor 936 can be removably secured in a groove or other cavity 942 for mounting in the cylindrical part 90. See, for example, FIG. 36 and 37. In addition, the primary conductive element 932 may be removably connected to the helical conductor assembly 934 using the connector assembly 933. In particular, the detachable connector assembly 933 can be used to connect the primary conductive element 932 to the first end 938 of the spirally wound conductor 936 to allow the removal of the rotary element 92 from the cylindrical portion 90. In other designs where it is not intended to separate the rotary portion 92 from the cylindrical portion, the first end 938 of the spirally wound conductor 936 can be fixedly fixed on the cylindrical part 90, and the primary conductive element 932 can be permanently fixed (e.g. by soldering) at the first end of the spirally wound conductor 936.

The second end 940 of the spirally wound conductor 936 can be fixedly attached to the rotary element 92 by means of glue, mechanical stops, latch elements, etc. In alternative embodiments, the second end 940 of the spirally wound conductor 936 can be detachably secured in a groove or other fixing element in the rotary element 92, in order to ensure that the spirally wound conductor 936 is disconnected from the rotatable portion 92. As can be seen in FIG. 32 and 33, the secondary conductive element 944 of the barrel is connected to the second end 940 of the node 934 of the spiral wire. The secondary conductive element 944 of the barrel can be fixed inside the rotating element 92 and pass through the hollow node 16 of the elongated barrel. For example, the secondary conductive element 944 of the barrel can pass through the node 16 of the elongated barrel to its distal end to come into contact with other conductors, sensors, components with power supply, etc., which are connected with the connected surgical end effector, loading block and so on. Thus, when the doctor rotates the rotating element 92 relative to the housing 12, the spiral conductor assembly 934 and, in particular, the spiral wound conductor 936 will wind into a slightly denser spiral, simultaneously providing power from the power source 200 to the surgical end effector, loading unit, etc. if the doctor rotates the rotating element 92 relative to the housing 12 in the opposite direction, the coiled cable 936 will unwind somewhat while still providing power from the source 200 power supplies for various components, sensors, etc. at the surgical end effector, loading unit, etc.

As can also be seen in FIG. 34 and 35, the conductor control system 930 may also include a rotation limiter assembly, generally referred to as element 950. In at least one design, the rotation limiter assembly 950, for example, comprises a limiter element 952 that is secured to the rotary element 92 c is movable and threadedly engaged with a threaded portion 99 on the cylinder 90 of the housing 12. The restrictor 952 may include a pair of opposing protrusions 954 that are located on each side of the axial ribbed of portion 958 formed on the rotating member 92, as shown in FIG. 33. This design allows the stop 952 to move axially within the rotating member 92 as the rotating member 92 rotates on the cylindrical portion 90 of the housing 12. The opposite end 960 of the stop member 952 is threadedly engaged with the threaded portion 99 of the cylinder 90. The proximal retaining wall passing inward. 962 of the rotating member 92 and the distal retaining wall 964 extending inward serve to limit the travel distance TD by which the limiter 942 can move along the axis as rotate the rotating element 92 on the cylindrical part 90.

In FIG. 33, a stop 952 is provided that is approximately halfway between the proximal stop wall 952 and the distal stop wall 954. In this position, turning the rotary member 92 in the first direction relative to the cylindrical portion 90 will cause the stop to move axially in the distal direction DD until until the limiter 952 comes into contact with the distal retaining wall 964, as shown in FIG. 34. Similarly, turning the rotary element 92 in the opposite direction relative to the cylindrical part 90 causes the axial movement of the stop 952 in the proximal direction PD until it comes into contact with the proximal retaining wall 962 of the rotary element 92. Thus, this design limits the number full revolutions of the rotating member 92 around the cylindrical portion 90 to prevent accidental damage to the spiral conductor assembly 934. For example, the stop assembly 950 may allow the physician to rotate the elongated stem assembly, and in particular the rotating member 92, by at least one full revolution, but not more than, for example, three full revolutions around the cylindrical part 90 in any direction. However, the number of revolutions or, more specifically, the scale of the rotational movement of the rotary element 92 on the cylindrical part 90 can be adjusted by changing the magnitude of the distance TD.

In FIG. 33, a stop 952 is provided in a “neutral” or “central” position, and such a stop is centered between the distal stop wall 954 and the proximal stop wall 952. At least in one form, biasing elements 980 can be used to bias the stop 952 to a neutral position if the elongated barrel assembly 16 and the rotating member 92 are in the corresponding neutral position. If the doctor performs the rotational movement of the rotating section 92, the node 16 of the elongated trunk will rotate as described above. However, when the rotational movement of the rotating member 92 and the elongated barrel assembly 16 ceases, the biasing members 980 will return the stop 952 to the neutral position.

For example, at least one surgical instrument may comprise a housing, which may include a rotatable element mounted on a mounting portion of the housing to rotate around it for a certain rotation range. The elongated barrel assembly, which defines the longitudinal axis of the tool, can be functionally connected with the rotating element for rotational movement with it around the longitudinal axis of the tool. The surgical instrument may further comprise a power source and include a conductor control system. The conductor control system may comprise a conductor spool assembly that can be mounted on a rotating member and may include a first end of a conductor that is secured to a mounting portion of the housing, and a second end of a conductor that is secured to a rotational member to rotate a place with it in a certain range turns. The conductor control system may further comprise a primary conductor, which can be fixed inside the housing and configured to transmit power from the power source to the conductor spool assembly. The trunk conductor may be connected to the conductor spool assembly for transmitting power to the distal end of the elongated trunk assembly.

Another example of a surgical instrument may include a housing in which a rotating member is mounted on a mounting portion of the housing. The surgical instrument may further comprise an elongated shaft assembly that defines the longitudinal axis of the instrument and may be operatively associated with a rotating member for rotational movement with it around the longitudinal axis of the instrument. The surgical instrument may further comprise a power source and means for supplying power from the power source through a conductor that passes through the elongated trunk assembly. The surgical instrument may further comprise means for restricting the rotational movement of the rotating member around the mounting portion to a certain range of rotational motion, which comprises at least one full revolution, but no more than three full revolutions around the mounting portion.

As indicated herein, an end effector may be mounted on a surgical instrument. As also indicated herein, a surgical instrument may include a trigger actuator configured to eject the brackets from an end effector including a cassette with brackets. As shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 94, a surgical instrument 9000, for example, may comprise a handle 9010 with a housing, a gripping portion 9012, a trigger actuator 9014, and an engine located inside the housing. Surgical instrument 9000 may further comprise a barrel 9040 including a trigger shaft 9020 that can be distally and / or retracted proximally by an engine. In certain circumstances, the end effector may comprise a distal portion that can swivel relative to the proximal portion around the articulation. In other circumstances, the end effector may not be articulated. The surgical instrument may further comprise an articulated pivot drive configured to pivot at least a portion of the end effector. As shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 94, a surgical instrument 9000, for example, may include an articulated pivot actuator 9070, which may be configured to move a distal portion of the end effector around the articulation. The end effector shown in FIG. 94, i.e., the end effector 9060 is not an end effector configured for articulation, however, in the design of the surgical instrument 9000, an end effector adapted for articulation can be used. When using an end effector made without the possibility of articulating rotation, for example, such as an end effector 9060, with a surgical tool 9000, the operation of the articulated rotary actuator 9070 may not affect the operation of the end effector 9060.

In addition to the foregoing, the end effector may include drive systems that correspond to the drive systems of the surgical instrument. For example, end effector 9060 may include a trigger element, which may be in functional communication with trigger barrel 9020 of surgical instrument 9000 when an end effector 9060 is mounted on a surgical instrument. Similarly, the end effector may comprise a pivoting drive, which may be in functional interaction with the pivoting shaft of the surgical instrument if the end effector is mounted on the surgical instrument. Moreover, for example, the end effector 9060 may comprise a proximal joint portion 9069, which may be connected to the distal portion 9042 of the shaft trunk 9040 of the surgical instrument 9000 if the end effector 9060 is mounted on the surgical instrument 9000. In various circumstances, it may be necessary to properly use the end effector. the correct assembly of the connection sections, the drive system and the swivel system of the end effector and surgical instrument.

As shown in FIG. 94, the handle 9010 may include a trigger 9014, which, when actuated by the user of the surgical instrument 9000, may be configured to control the engine in the handle 9010. In various circumstances, the handle 9010 may include a controller that may be configured to detect a trigger hook 9014. In some cases, when the trigger 9014 is triggered, an electrical circuit can be closed, which is in signal communication with the controller. In such cases, the controller may be configured to control the engine to extend the launch barrel 9020 distally and move the jaw 9062 of the end effector 9060 to the jaw 9064. In some circumstances, the handle 9010 may include at least one sensor configured to detect force applied to the trigger hook 9014, and / or the angle that the trigger hook 9014 is tilted. The sensor or sensors may be in signal communication with the controller, and the controller may be configured to adjusting the motor speed in dependence on one or more signals from the sensors. The handle 9010 may include a fuse 9015, which must be pressed before the controller starts the engine in response to an input signal from the trigger 9014. In various circumstances, the fuse 9015 may be in signal communication with the controller, and the controller may electronically block the use of the motor before until the fuse 9015 is pressed. The handle 9010 may also include a retraction actuator 9074, which, when activated, may cause the engine to run in a opposite direction to ensure retraction of the trigger rod 9020 and allow the take jaw of the jaws of 9062 9064. In various circumstances, closure of the circuit may occur at actuation of the actuator retracting 9074, which is in signal communication with the controller. In some cases, it will be necessary to press fuse 9015 before the controller starts the engine in the opposite direction in response to a signal from the retraction actuator 9074.

Prior to and / or during the use of the surgical instrument 9000, such a surgical instrument 9000 and / or certain systems of the surgical instrument 9000 may cease to function, malfunction and / or fail. In certain circumstances, such violations and / or methods for their elimination may not be obvious to the user of the surgical instrument, which can create serious problems for the user. Moreover, this kind of uncertainty can increase the time required to eliminate the violation or “error”. The design of the 9000 surgical instrument has been improved over the above designs. As shown in FIG. 94, the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 may be configured to detect errors in the surgical instrument 9000 and report such an error to the user of the surgical instrument 9000 through one or more indicators. Surgical instrument 9000 may contain one or more indicators, which, when triggered by a controller, may indicate the nature of the error and / or otherwise draw attention to the system of surgical instrument 9000, which in one way or another is functioning with disabilities. For example, the surgical instrument 9000 may include an end effector indicator 9086, which, for example, may be configured to provide an indication that the end effector has not been installed on the barrel 9040 of the surgical instrument 9010. In various circumstances, the surgical instrument 9000 may include a sensor that can be configured to detect the installation of the end effector on the barrel 9040 and / or, accordingly, detect the absence of the installation of the end effector on the barrel 9040. The sensor can find in signal communication with the controller so that the controller can receive a signal from the sensor and confirm whether the end effector was installed on the trunk 9040. If the controller confirms that the end effector was not installed on the 9040 trunk, the controller can turn on the end effector indicator 9086. In various circumstances, the end effector indicator 9086 may include a light indication, such as, for example, a red light indication. In some circumstances, the end effector indicator 9086 may comprise an LED, such as, for example, a red LED. In addition to, or instead of, the surgical instrument 9000 may include a sensor that is in signal communication with the controller, which may be configured to detect whether an end effector mounted on the barrel 9040 has previously been used. For example, such a sensor may be configured with the possibility of confirming that at least some of the brackets located in the end effector have already been used and / or that the element for installing the brackets in the end effector has already been put forward. In such cases, the controller may include an end effector indicator 9086. Thus, the inclusion of the indicator 9086 end effector can transmit to the user of the surgical instrument 9000 a signal about the presence of a certain error associated with the end effector, and also that such an error should or must be eliminated before using the surgical instrument 9000. In the example of FIG. 94, it will become clear to the reader that the end effector indicator 9086 is adjacent to the distal end of the trunk 9040 and that, in various circumstances, it can be located on or adjacent to the distal portion 9042 of the trunk connection 9040. In various circumstances, the end effector indicator 9086 can be placed on the end effector 9060. In any case, if the end effector indicator 9086 is turned on due to the above, the user of the surgical instrument 9000 can quickly verify that there is an error and that such an error connected with the end effector. Turning on the end effector indicator 9086 may indicate to the user that the end effector is not complete on the barrel 9040 and / or the need to replace the end effector.

In addition to or instead of an end effector indicator 9086, a surgical instrument may include one or more indicators. For example, surgical instrument 9000 may include a trigger indicator 9081. The trigger indicator 9081 may be in signal communication with the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 so that when the controller detects an error related, for example, to the trigger of the surgical instrument 9000, the controller may turn on the trigger indicator 9081. As shown in FIG. 94, the trigger indicator 9081 may be adjacent to the trigger 9014. In such circumstances, the user of the surgical instrument 9000, seeing the trigger indicator 9081, can conclude that the error occurred is related to the trigger, and may proceed to identify the source of the error . In some circumstances, the controller may turn on the trigger indicator 9081, for example, if the battery of the surgical instrument 9000 is malfunctioning for one reason or another. For example, if the battery voltage is below the desired level, such a battery will not be able to control the engine as needed, and the trigger indicator 9081 may indicate, for example, that the battery needs to be replaced. In various circumstances, at present, the controller may block the operation of one or more operating systems of the surgical instrument 9000 if the controller includes an indicator, such as, for example, end effector indicator 9086 and / or trigger indicator 9081. For example, the controller may be capable of functional separation of the trigger 9014 from the engine so that the trigger 9014 does not operate the engine if, for example, the end effector indicator 9086 and / or the trigger indicator 9081 are lit. Such functional isolation of the trigger 9014 from the engine may also indicate to the user of the surgical instrument 9000 an error in the operation of the surgical instrument, as well as to indicate that the user should check the indicators of the surgical instrument 9000 to determine the nature of such an error.

As shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 94, the surgical instrument 9000 may comprise a retraction actuator indicator 9085 adjacent to the retraction actuator 9074. Similarly to the described above, the retraction actuator indicator 9085 can be in signal communication with the controller, and if the controller detects an error related, for example, to the retraction drive, the controller can turn on the retraction actuator indicator 9085. In various circumstances, the controller may turn on the retraction actuator indicator 9085 in the event that the fuse 9015 has not been pressed before the retraction actuator 9074 has been activated. In such circumstances, the retraction actuator indicator 9085 may serve as a reminder to press the fuse 9015. In certain circumstances, the surgical instrument 9000 may include a fuse indicator 9082 adjacent to the fuse 9015. In some circumstances, the surgical instrument controller 9000 may include a fuse indicator 9082 if the user actuates the retraction actuator 9074 until the fuse 9015 is activated. The fuse 9082 may be in signal communication with the controller, and if the controller detects that, for example, the starting system cannot be switched between the starting mode and the retract mode, the controller may turn on the fuse indicator 9082. Surgical instrument 9000 may include a pivoting actuator indicator 9084 adjacent to the pivoting actuator 9070. Similar to the above, the swivel actuator indicator 9084 may be in signal communication with the controller, and if the controller detects an error associated, for example, with the swivel drive, the controller may include a swivel actuator indicator 9084. Surgical instrument 9000 may include a trunk indicator 9083 located adjacent to a trunk connection configured to mount a table 9040 on the handle 9010. Similar to the above, the trunk indicator 9083 may be in signal communication with the controller, and if the controller detects an error related, for example, to barrel 9040, the controller may include an indicator 9083 rod.

As shown in FIG. 95, the surgical instrument 9100 may include a handle 9110 with a set of indicators 9190, configured to provide the user of the surgical instrument 9100 with an indication of one or more errors associated with the surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector connected thereto. The 9190 indicator set can be positioned in any convenient manner. In various circumstances, a set of indicators 9190 can be placed with the reproduction of a form or an exemplary form, for example, a surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector connected to it. In at least one case, the outer surface of the handle 9110 may, for example, comprise an image of a surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector connected to a surgical instrument. The set of indicators 9190 can be placed in accordance with the general outlines of the surgical instrument and the end effector so that, for example, to indicate the area of the surgical instrument 9100 and / or end effector where an error occurs, an error is recorded and / or where necessary check to fix the error. For example, the general outlines can be delimited so as to display an end effector 9060, a barrel 9040, a handle 9010, a trigger 9014, a fuse 9015, a return actuator 9074 and / or an articulated rotary actuator 9070. For example, in various circumstances, the end effector indicator 9192 may be adjacent to the image of the end effector 9060, the barrel indicator 9193 may be adjacent to the image of the barrel 9040, the trigger indicator 9191 may be adjacent to the trigger image 9014, the fuse indicator 9195 may be adjacent to the image fuse 9015, indicator 9196 return actuator can be adjacent to the image of the return actuator 9074, and / or indicator 9194 the pivoting actuator may be adjacent to the image of the pivoting actuator 9070. In various circumstances, each of indicators 9191, 9192, 9193, 9194, 9195 and / or 9196 may comprise an LED. In some circumstances, each LED may contain a red LED, which may be turned on by the controller to indicate the presence of an error. In various circumstances, the controller may be configured to turn on a pulsed indication of the LED, which can reduce the time required for the user to notice the indicator is triggered. In certain circumstances, each indicator may include an LED that can emit light of more than one color. In some circumstances, each such LED may be selectively emitted, for example, red light and green light. The controller may be configured to turn on a green LED if no errors were detected in the corresponding section of the surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector mounted on it, or alternatively red if an error was detected in the corresponding section of the surgical instrument 9100 and / or installed on it is an end effector.

In some circumstances, as described in more detail below, the surgical instrument controller 9000 may block one or more surgical instrument actuators, such as, for example, a trigger 9014, a retraction actuator 9074, and / or a pivot actuator 9070, if the controller includes one or another indicator associated with such an actuator. For example, the controller may lock the trigger 9014 if it turns on the trigger indicator 9081, the retract actuator 9074 if it includes the retract actuator indicator 9085, and / or the pivot actuator 9070 if it includes the pivot actuator indicator 9084. The handle 9010 of the surgical instrument 9000, for example, may include a trigger guard that can be selectively “locked” by the trigger 9014 and prevent the trigger 9014 from being triggered. The trigger guard may prevent the trigger 9014 from tripping sufficiently to drive the surgical motor tool. In at least one circumstance, it is possible to prevent the trigger 9014 from closing the trigger switch. In certain circumstances, the surgical instrument controller 9000 may be configured to electronically lock the trigger 9014, i.e., in addition to the trigger fuse being triggered, the power supply to the engine is cut off. In such circumstances, electronic locking and mechanical locking can duplicate each other; however, a mechanical interlock can provide the user with a surgical instrument 9000 a feedback signal about the functional shutdown of the trigger drive. As indicated above, the surgical instrument controller 9000 may also provide feedback, for example, via trigger indicator 9081. Thus, a tactile feedback and / or visual feedback of an error may be transmitted to the user of the surgical instrument 9000. In some circumstances, a tactile feedback signal may cause the user of the surgical instrument 9000 to start looking for a visual feedback signal. For example, the user may try to actuate the trigger 9014, and if the user cannot trigger the trigger 9014, he can then inspect the instrument for indicators that have worked. In any case, after eliminating the error, the controller can unlock the trigger 9014 by turning off the trigger hook fuse.

As shown in FIG. 100, the surgical instrument 9000 may include a trigger fuse 9390, which may be configured to lock the trigger 9014. The trigger fuse 9390 may switch between the locked state shown in FIG. 100, 101, and 103, and an unlocked state shown in FIG. 102. If the end effector is not mounted on the shaft 9040 of the surgical instrument 9000, the trigger hook fuse 9390 may be biased towards its locked state. In this locked state, the trigger fuse 9330 may prevent or at least substantially prevent the trigger 9014 from tripping. In particular, the trigger fuse 9390 may include a barrel gear rack 9391, a gear wheel 9392 and a handle gear rack 9393, and also a biasing element, for example, such as a spring, which can be adapted to bias the barrel gear rack 9391 to the proximal position, and the handle gear rack 9393 to the lower position. The proximal position of the barrel gear rack 9391 and the lower position of the handle gear rack 9393 are shown in FIG. 101. As shown primarily in FIG. 101, the handle gear rack 9393 may include holes 9396, and the trigger 9014 may include protrusions 9395 which, when the handle gear is in its lower position, are not aligned with the holes 9396. In particular, trigger 9014 may include a toggle switch with the hinge axis 9397, while with the handle gear rack 9393 in its lower position, turning the trigger hook 9014 will force at least one of the protrusions 9395 extending from the trigger hook 9014 to rest against the handle gear rack 9393 and prevent full operation of the trigger hook 9014.

If the end effector is mounted on the barrel 9040, then, in addition to the above, the trigger hook fuse 9390 can be moved between its locked configuration and its unlocked configuration. In the unlocked configuration of the trigger fuse 9390, as shown primarily in FIG. 102, the handle gear rack 9393 may be in its upper position. In the upper position of the gear rack 9393, the openings 9396 in the gear rack 9393, the handles are aligned with the protrusions 9395 extending from the trigger 9014. In such circumstances, the trigger 9014 can be switched to trigger the trigger 9014. In particular, the protrusions 9395 can pass through the holes 9396, providing the ability to switch the trigger 9014 around the axis 9397 of the hinge. Thus, in light of the above, the movement of the handle gear 9393 between its lower and upper positions respectively locks and unlocks the trigger 9014. Various mechanisms can be used to move the handle gear 9393 between its lower position and its upper position. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the barrel 9040 may include a trigger lock actuator 9399, which can be displaced proximally by the end effector if the end effector is mounted on the barrel 9040. The barrel gear rack 9391 may be mounted and / or extend proximally from the trigger lock actuator 9399 and may contain teeth 9391a formed on its surface. The teeth 9391a can be engaged with the teeth 9392a on the gear 9392 so that when the trigger lock actuator 9399 and the barrel gear 9391 are proximal, the gear 9392 can rotate about its axis. Accordingly, the gear rack 9393 of the handle may contain formed on the surface of the teeth 9393a of the rack, which also enter into gear engagement with the teeth 9392a of the gear wheel, and thus, with the proximal movement of the gear rack 9391 of the barrel, the gear rack 9393 of the handle can move from its lower position to its upper position, thereby unlocking the trigger 9014. To return the handle gear 9393 to its lower position, the barrel gear 9391 can be moved distally to rotate the gear to 9392 Forest in the opposite direction. In various circumstances, the gear rack 9391 of the barrel can move distally as a result of removing the end effector from the barrel 9040.

As shown in FIG. 96-97, handle 9010, for example, may include a trigger fuse 9290. The trigger fuse 9290 may include a housing 9291, a deployable locking pin 9292, a latch 9293, and a biasing member 9294 configured to move the locking pin 9294 between the non-deployed position shown in FIG. 96 and 98, and the expanded position shown in FIG. 97 and 99. In various embodiments, the latch 9293 may be formed of a heat-sensitive material that is sensitive to heat. In at least one such case, the heat-sensitive material may be configured to transition between a solid material and a fluid, such as, for example, a liquid, a suspension and / or gas, and / or, for example, between a solid material and a semi-solid material. When the thermally sensitive material transitions or at least partially transitions between the solid state and the fluid state, the latch 9293 can release the locking pin 9294 to lock the trigger and / or any other suitable trigger mechanism 9010. In various embodiments, when deployed, the locking pin 9294 can smoothly go behind the trigger and / or otherwise interact with it. The handle may include any suitable number of fuses 9290 of the trigger, or the like, to selectively lock any suitable number of triggers and / or, for example, buttons. The reader will understand that the fuse 9290 trigger can be performed without the possibility of reset. In such embodiments, the triggered trigger fuse 9290 may permanently block, for example, the handle trigger of the handle so that the use of the tool becomes impossible. Permanent locking of the trigger and / or any other trigger of the tool may mean that the use of the tool is absolutely impossible, although in other circumstances the permanent locking cannot be reset immediately, and you may need to transfer the tool to, for example, a qualified technician or a special institution where they can evaluate whether the tool is recoverable and subsequently used or whether the tool should be disposed of. With at least partial conversion of the heat-sensitive material of the fixture 9293 into a liquid, a technician may suggest that the tool was exposed to a temperature higher than the transition temperature of the heat-sensitive material. In various embodiments, the transition temperature of the heat-sensitive material may be the temperature at which a solid material, for example, turns into a liquid, evaporates and / or sublimates. In any case, the heat-sensitive material and, thus, the transition temperature of the lock 9293 can be chosen so that the release of the locking pin 9294 may indicate that the surgical instrument has been exposed to a temperature exceeding a certain threshold temperature. In various cases, the surgical instrument may be damaged due to exposure to excessive temperature. For example, a surgical instrument may include solid electronic components that could be damaged by exposure to such excessive temperature. In such cases, the threshold temperature of the tool and the transition temperature of the latch 9293 can be equal to, or at least substantially equal to, and, as a result, it can be assumed that the tool was not exposed to a temperature exceeding the threshold temperature if the fuse 9290 of the trigger was not is actuated, and accordingly, that the tool has been exposed to a temperature exceeding the threshold temperature if the trigger fuse 9290 has been activated, and thus irurgichesky tool could be damaged, or, at least, it should be checked for damage.

In addition to the above, when sterilizing a surgical instrument, it may be exposed to temperatures in excess of the threshold temperature and / or transition temperature. Many sterilization procedures are known, some of which include the step of heating a surgical instrument. In addition to, or instead of, trigger trigger fuse 3290, the surgical instrument may include at least one temperature sensor capable of evaluating the temperature to which the surgical instrument is exposed. In various cases, the temperature sensor or sensors may exchange signals with the controller of the surgical instrument, which may be configured to evaluate the fact that the surgical instrument is exposed to a temperature exceeding the threshold temperature. In at least one such case, the controller may include a microprocessor and an algorithm for evaluating signals received from the temperature sensor or sensors. If the controller determines that the threshold temperature has been reached and / or exceeded, the controller may constantly interfere with the operation of the instrument. In other words, the controller may provide electronic locking of the surgical instrument. Similarly, the permanent locking of the tool may mean that the use of the tool is absolutely impossible, although in other cases the permanent locking cannot be reset immediately, it may be necessary to transfer the tool to, for example, a qualified technician or a special institution where they can assess whether the tool should be restored and subsequent use or tool should be disposed of. It will become clear to the reader that when sterilizing a surgical instrument, a power source is required for the operation of the controller and / or sensors of the surgical instrument. Several embodiments of surgical instruments include a removable battery or an electrical power source that can be removed prior to sterilization of the surgical instrument, in which case sterilization and / or treatment is performed separately for the removable battery. After removing the removable power source from these instruments described above, as the reader will understand, the controller and / or sensors may not receive enough energy to monitor the temperature of the surgical instrument. Embodiments of surgical instruments described herein may include a battery or power supply that is not removed from the surgical instrument during processing. Such a battery may be known as a permanent battery, as it can power the controller and / or temperature sensors during sterilization of the instrument. In various embodiments, a tool including a permanent battery may also include a removable and / or rechargeable battery. In any case, the instrument may have sufficient power to detect and record the temperature to which it is exposed. In at least one instance, the instrument controller may include a memory chip configured to store temperature readings, for example, in a temperature register. In various circumstances, the controller can record sensor readings periodically, i.e., at a specific sampling rate. In some cases, the controller may be configured such that when recording temperature readings above a certain temperature, although below a threshold temperature, the controller may increase the sampling frequency. In some cases, the controller may be configured such that by sequentially recording a temperature reading that is lower than a certain temperature, the controller may reduce the sampling frequency, for example, back to the original sampling frequency.

In FIG. 99A shows an algorithm for a controller. In some cases, this algorithm may include a starting procedure for a surgical instrument, for example, when a surgical instrument is first used after sterilization. The start-up procedure may begin after turning on the tool. The tool can turn on automatically after installing the end effector on the tool. In at least one case, when the end effector is mounted on a surgical instrument, the switch closes, exchanging signals with the controller. In addition to or instead of the above, turning on the tool may occur, for example, after pressing a button and / or switch on the handle. In any case, the controller can then evaluate the temperature readings stored on the memory chip described above. For example, the controller may evaluate whether any of the stored temperature readings are equal to or exceed threshold temperature. If the controller determines that all stored temperature readings are below the threshold temperature, the controller can continue the normal start-up procedure. If the controller determines that one or more of the stored temperature readings is equal to or exceeds a threshold temperature, the controller may continue to perform an alternative procedure. In at least one example, the controller may completely shut off the tool, for example, by electronic locking and / or mechanical locking, as described herein. In some other cases, the controller may allow the use of the instrument, even if the controller determines that one or more of the stored temperature readings is equal to or higher than the threshold temperature. The controller can save this definition in its memory and / or inform the user about the threshold temperature being exceeded by means of a screen, for example, using an LED, and then continue with its normal start-up procedure. In various cases, the controller can consider the threshold temperature as an absolute maximum, i.e., a single temperature reading equal to or higher than the threshold temperature is enough to start an alternative start program or completely lock the tool. In other cases, the controller may be configured to evaluate whether a thermogram in which the temperature readings are equal to or higher than the threshold temperature is sufficient to run an alternative start program or completely lock the tool, since both time and temperature can be factors that are necessary consider when assessing the likelihood of tool damage, for example, during sterilization.

As shown in FIG. 104-109, a surgical instrument, for example, such as a surgical instrument 9000, may include a handle 9410, including a trigger release system 9490. The handle 9410 may be similar to the handle 9110 in many aspects, and for brevity, these aspects will not be repeated herein. Similarly to the foregoing, the trigger guard system 9490 can be configured to lock and release the trigger 9414. Also, similarly to the foregoing, the trigger guard system 9490 can be locked when the end effector is not mounted on the barrel 9040 of the surgical instrument, as shown in FIG. 104-107, and can be brought into an unlocked state when the end effector is fully mounted on the barrel 9040, as shown in FIG. 108 and 109. When installing the end effector on the barrel 9040, in addition to the above and as shown mainly in FIG. 108 and 109, the end effector can push the sensing element 9499 proximally. The sensing element 9499 can pass through the barrel 9040 from the distal end of the barrel 9040 to its proximal end. During use, the end effector can abut against the distal end of the sensor element 9499 when the end effector is mounted on the barrel 9040 and push the sensor element 9499 proximally, as described above. When pushing the sensor element 9499 proximally, as shown in FIG. 108 and 109, the sensing element 9499 can contact the swing lever 9486 of the trigger lock system 9490 and rotate the swing lever 9486 up. The swing arm 9486 may comprise an end that is rotatable and secured to the handle body by means of a pin 9487 designed to allow the swing arm 9486 to rotate about an axis. The swing arm 9486 may further comprise a cam follower portion 9488 that the sensor 9499 can contact. During use, the sensor 9499 can move the swing lever 9486 between the lower position and the upper position to move the trigger guard system 9490 between the locked position and the unlocked position position accordingly. The trigger guard system 9490 may further include a locking pin 9485 attached to the swing arm 9486, which may rise up when the swing arm 9486 is rotated up and down when the swing arm 9486 is rotated down, respectively. The locking pin 9485 may comprise an upper end rotatably mounted on the swing arm 9486 and a lower end that extends through an opening 9483 formed in the trigger 9481 when the locking pin 9485 is in the lower position. In various circumstances, a hole 9483 may be formed in the lever 9482 extending from the trigger 9414. When the locking pin 9485 is placed in the hole 9483, the trigger 9414 cannot rotate around its fulcrum 9484, and therefore, the user cannot bring the trigger 9414 into act. When the locking pin 9485 is in the upper position, the locking pin 9485 cannot be located in the hole 9483, and therefore, the user can trigger the trigger 9414. When the end effector is disconnected from the barrel 9040, the sensing element 9499 can be moved from the proximal position to its distal position. In other words, if the end effector is not attached to the barrel 9040, a biasing element, such as, for example, a spring 9489, can bias the swing arm 9486 down and, accordingly, bias the trigger lock system 9490 into a locked state. In addition, the spring 9489 can exert a biasing force on the sensor element 9499 through the lever 9482 and push the sensor element 9499 distally when the end effector is not mounted on the barrel 9040.

In addition to the above, the operation of the sensing element 9499 and the trigger hook fuse system 9490 may serve as a means of interacting with the user of the surgical instrument. For example, when the end effector is not mounted on the barrel 9040, the sensor 9499 is distally displaced and the trigger 9414 will be blocked, and when the user tries to trigger the trigger 9414, the user will quickly realize that the trigger system of the surgical instrument is not working properly. In this example, the user will quickly understand that for the use of a surgical instrument, it is necessary to install an end effector on the barrel 9040. In various circumstances, the trigger can be locked if the end effector has already been used, even if it is attached to the barrel 9040. In at least one of these circumstances, the end effector may include a trigger element, which when positioned in its most proximal position, can push the sensor element proximally when the end effect is installed torus on the trunk 9040; however, if such a trigger element is already at least partially extended, when the end effector is installed on the barrel 9040, the sensor element may not push proximally, and therefore the trigger hook may remain locked. And in this case, such a trigger fuse may indicate to the user that there are problems with the trigger drive, namely that in these circumstances the end effector has already been used. In the absence of such tactile locking, the user will be faced with circumstances in which he will be able to click on the actuator, and the surgical instrument will not respond to pressing the actuator, which can lead to confusion for the user.

As described above, when a previously unused end effector is installed on the barrel 9040, the sensing element can advance proximally, releasing the trigger. In various circumstances, the sensing element and trigger fuse system can be configured such that the trigger cannot be unlocked until the end effector is fully installed on the barrel 9040. If the end effector is only partially installed on the barrel 9040, sufficient displacement of the sensor required to release the trigger. And in this case, such a trigger lock may indicate to the user that there are problems with the trigger, in particular, in the circumstances, that the end effector is not completely installed on the barrel 9040.

As described above, the end effector may be mounted on a surgical instrument, which may include a controller configured to identify the end effector. In some cases, the controller may be configured to evaluate the identity of the end effector when the controller is activated. In some cases, as shown in FIG. 176, the controller can be activated by inserting the battery into the handle. In addition to or instead of the above, the controller may be configured to perform an assessment of the state of the surgical instrument upon activation of the controller. For example, the controller may be configured to evaluate the position of the closing element of the closing system, the position of the starting element of the drive system and / or the position of the hinge element of the swivel system. In some cases, the surgical instrument may include an absolute position sensor for detecting the position of the trigger element. Such a sensor is described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 803,097, entitled “SURGICAL INSTRUMENT POSSIBLE WITH A HINGE TURN AND CONTAINING A START-UP DRIVE”, filed March 14, 2013, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some cases, the surgical instrument may include an end-of-course recorder. Such an end-of-stroke recorder may include a mechanical switch, a counter and / or relay and / or an electronic switch, a counter and / or relay, including data stored in volatile memory. In such an embodiment, the controller may evaluate whether the previous starting stroke has been completed. Such embodiments may be useful in a variety of situations. For example, the controller may be accidentally turned off and / or the power may be interrupted during surgery, and upon reactivation, the controller may not be able to assess whether the tool is running for the first time or if the tool is in the middle of a previous start-up stroke. The end-of-turn recorder helps the controller distinguish between these two events. In addition, the end-of-stroke recorder, which does not turn off or does not restart if the power supply to the instrument is lost or interrupted, allows the controller to evaluate whether the power to the surgical instrument has stopped during the start-up stroke. If the controller determines that the previous starting stroke has not been completed, the controller may be configured to, firstly, enable power supply to the engine to complete the start stroke and / or, secondly, enable power supply to the engine to retract the start element, the closing element and / or the hinge element in their original or inactive positions. In various cases, the controller may offer the surgical instrument user the option of continuing the starting stroke or returning the mechanical systems and / or electrical systems of the instrument to their original or inactive positions. In such embodiments, the surgical instrument cannot automatically return these systems to their original or inactive positions. In any case, after the surgical instrument returns to its original or inactive state, the previously activated end effector can be removed from the surgical instrument and / or the inactive end effector can be mounted on the surgical instrument. In various cases, as indicated herein, the surgical instrument may then identify, or at least attempt to identify, an inactive end effector.

As shown in FIG. 177, the surgical instrument controller may perform a diagnostic check of the instrument and / or battery. For example, after activating the controller, the surgical instrument can evaluate whether the surgical instrument has been exposed to temperatures above the threshold temperature of the surgical instrument, as described herein. Thus, for example, a surgical instrument can evaluate the available power, voltage and / or current of a battery, as described herein. If the tool fails one or more of these diagnostic tests, the controller may not supply power to the engine by physically locking the tool and / or indicate to the user a negative test result. In such circumstances, the tool can record such negative results in memory so that the verification data can help the technician to further evaluate the tool. Assuming that the tool passes these diagnostic tests, the tool, similarly to the above, can record test data associated with passing diagnostic tests. In any case, the tool can then continue to evaluate whether the tool is in the initial or inactive state and the identification of the end effector. As indicated herein, a description is provided of a procedure for identifying an end effector. In addition, this document describes an assessment of which end effector is attached to a surgical instrument — a “smart” end effector or a “mute” end effector. In various cases, a smart end effector may be an end effector that can transmit parameters and / or at least part of the operating program to a surgical instrument as part of an identification process. A smart end effector can be an end effector that in one way or another identifies the use of the end effector with a surgical instrument. In some cases, a “mute” end effector is an end effector that in no way identifies the use of the end effector with a surgical instrument. An example of a working procedure in accordance with the above is presented in FIG. 178.

As described herein, a battery may be used to power the surgical instrument. In various cases, the surgical instrument and / or battery may be configured to evaluate the ability of the battery to provide the surgical instrument with sufficient power to perform one or more functions. In some cases, the surgical instrument and / or battery may be configured to indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery has sufficient power to perform one or more functions. In FIG. 179 shows a circuit configured to indicate battery voltage. Such a circuit may be present in a surgical instrument and / or battery. In any case, the circuit may include a plurality of indicators that may indicate the charge level, voltage, and / or power provided by the battery. For example, the circuit may include three indicators, including a first indicator configured to indicate that the battery has at least a first voltage, a second indicator configured to indicate that the battery has at least a second voltage, and a third indicator, configured to indicate that the battery has at least a third voltage. As shown in FIG. 179, the circuit 12100 may include a first indicator circuit 12110, a second indicator circuit 12120, and a third indicator circuit 12130 that are parallel to each other. By closing the switch 12101, the battery potential can be applied to the indicator circuits 12110, 12120 and 12130. The first indicator circuit 12110 may include a zener diode 12111, an LED 12112 and a resistor R1 12113. Similarly, the second indicator circuit 12120 may include a zener diode 12121, an LED 12122 and resistor R2 12123, and the third indicator circuit 12130 may include a zener diode 12131, LED 12132 and resistor R3 12133. Each of the Zener diodes 12111, 12121 and 12131 may have a different breaking voltage. For example, the first Zener diode 12111 can have an interrupt voltage of 11.5 V, for example, the second Zener diode 12121 can have an interrupt voltage of 10 V, and, for example, the third Zener diode 12131 can have an interrupt voltage of 8 V. In this embodiment, when the battery voltage 11.5 V or more, the LEDs 12112, 12122 and 12132 light up. Turning on all the LEDs may indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery is fully charged and / or at least has sufficient charge to perform any function, t buoy surgical instrument. When the battery voltage is 10 V or more, but less than 11.5 V, the LEDs 12112 and 12122 light up, but the LED 12132 does not light up. The inclusion of the LEDs 12112 and 12122, but not the LED 12132, can indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery is not charged fully, but at least has sufficient charge to perform any function required by a surgical instrument. When the battery voltage is 8 V or more, but less than 10 V, the LED 12112 lights up, but the LEDs 12122 and 12132 do not light up. The inclusion of the LED 12112, but not the LEDs 12122 and 12132, can indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery is running out and that the battery may or may not have enough charge to perform certain functions required by the surgical instrument. Thus, the LED screen may indicate a possible need to replace the battery. When the battery voltage is less than 8 V, none of the LEDs 12112, 12122 and 12132 light up. Thus, the LED screen may indicate that the battery cannot be used to reliably perform any function of a surgical instrument. Although circuit 12100 contains three indicator circuits 12110, 12120 and 12130, the circuit may include more than three indicator circuits having Zener diodes with distinct breaking voltages. Such an embodiment may provide, for example, a clear differential indication of the battery voltage. Other embodiments are provided in which only two indicator chains are used.

In various cases, the battery may include a circuit configured to indicate that the battery is charged and / or has a charge sufficient to be used with a surgical instrument. In various cases, the surgical instrument may include a circuit configured to indicate that the battery connected to it is charged and / or has a charge sufficient to be used with the surgical instrument. In any case, as shown in FIG. 180, circuit 12200 may include a microprocessor 12201 that includes one or more keys in connection with a battery, such as, for example, a 9V battery. Chain 12200 may further comprise a capacitor 12202, such as, for example, a microfarad capacitor 10, which may receive energy from a circuit including a diode 12203 and a resistor 12204. The circuit 12200 may further comprise an LED 12205 and a resistor 12206 in the discharge path of the capacitor 12202. Such a circuit can blink the LED 12205 as long as the battery can supply up to the residual voltage to the circuit 12200. In such cases, the user can identify the blinking of the LED 12205 and understand that the battery has at least some energy, if not enough energy, for use with a surgical instrument. If the user does not identify the blinking LED 12205, the user may assume that the battery power is not enough to use it.

In various circumstances, as described herein and shown in FIG. 284, the battery and / or surgical instrument configured to be used with the battery may include a diagnostic circuit configured to evaluate the energy, voltage, and / or current provided by the battery. In FIG. 184 shows a diagnostic circuit 12300. Such a circuit may be configured to evaluate a battery prior to use with a surgical instrument, during use with a surgical instrument, and / or after use with a surgical instrument. In various cases, the battery may be used more than once, and in various cases, the battery may be rechargeable or non-rechargeable. The number of battery uses and information obtained during the diagnostic evaluation of the battery can be stored in a memory chip in the battery and / or surgical instrument. In FIG. 183 is an information table 12400 containing information of a type that can be registered in a memory chip. For example, the number of uses may be recorded. For each application, for example, the maximum voltage and / or maximum current are recorded, according to which the battery is charged and / or recharged. For each application, the maximum permissible current, the applied current in mA, the applied current in Ah and / or the minimum voltage applied during application can be recorded. Each application can record, for example, battery charge time, battery usage time, battery temperature during charging and / or battery temperature during use. These are just some examples of the information that can be stored in memory. In various cases, such information can be used by a surgical instrument and / or technician, for example, to assess previous battery performance and / or battery suitability for future use.

In various cases, as shown in FIG. 182, the battery and / or surgical instrument used with the battery may include a circuit to turn off the battery when the battery level drops below the minimum charge level. In some cases, the lithium-ion battery cell may overheat when used while its charge level is below the minimum charge level, and the disconnect circuit, which prevents the battery from being used when the charge level is below the minimum charge level, can prevent overheating.

In various cases, as shown in FIG. 181, the surgical instrument may include a controller configured to perform a diagnostic test of the instrument and / or the battery mounted on it. For example, the controller may include a clock and a memory chip configured to evaluate and record the time of use of the instrument and / or battery. In some cases, the controller may be configured to turn off the tool and / or battery if a lot of time has passed since the last use of the tool and / or battery. In some cases, the tool and / or battery may include one or more sensors that can be configured to evaluate various parameters of the tool and / or battery, for example, such as temperature, humidity and / or time during which the tool and / or the battery has been exposed to temperature and / or humidity. The controller can be configured to evaluate the correct operation of the sensors, and in case of their incorrect operation, the controller can turn off the tool and / or battery. The controller may also be configured to estimate the number of periods of use of the tool and / or battery, and if the number of periods of use exceeds a certain amount, the controller may turn off the tool and / or battery. The controller may also be configured to estimate the energy that the battery can provide, as described herein, and if there is a lack of energy, the controller can turn off the tool and / or battery.

As described herein, a surgical instrument may include various sensors for collecting feedback and / or other instrument status information. In addition, the surgical instrument may include sensory indicators for transmitting feedback and / or instrument status information to the user. In some cases, the endoscope can be used with a surgical instrument to transmit additional feedback and / or instrument status information to the user. As described herein, an endoscope and a surgical instrument can exchange signals with a screen that can display, for example, feedback data received from an endoscope and / or from sensors of a surgical instrument. As shown in FIG. 75-93, the endoscope 5018 (FIG. 93) can exchange signals with the screen 5002 (FIG. 75). In some embodiments, the screen 5002 may comprise, for example, a screen projection device (HUD) and / or video monitor. In addition, the screen 5002 may be, for example, a plasma screen, an LCD screen, or an electroluminescent screen. In various embodiments, the screen 5002 may broadcast a first information layer 5010, which may include, for example, feedback in the form of a video image. Feedback in the form of a video image can be feedback in the form of images viewed with an endoscope 5018 (FIG. 93), for example, on a surgical field, and can display, for example, at least a portion of a surgical instrument 5020 viewed with an endoscope 5018.

In various embodiments, the screen 5002 may include a touch screen 5004. As shown in FIG. 75, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to operate the screen 5002 and / or surgical instrument 5020. For example, the touch screen 5004 can communicate with the screen 5002, and input devices used with the touch screen 5004 allow you to adjust and / or change information displayed on the screen 5002. In such embodiments, the user can operate the screen 5002 without using additional input devices, such as, for example, a keyboard and / or computer mouse. In other words, additional tools and / or input parts may not be required to adjust and / or change the information displayed on the screen 5002. In addition, in various embodiments, the touch screen 5004 is easy to clean and / or sterilize. For example, the touch screen 5004 may include a flat surface that can be easily wiped clean in the surgical field and / or operating room. In addition, or alternatively, the touch screen 5004 can directly and / or indirectly exchange signals with the surgical instrument 5020 such that when data is entered on the touch screen 5004, the data is transmitted to the surgical instrument 5020. The user may, for example, be a surgeon, operator and / or an assistant.

In various embodiments, the touch screen 5004 may be located on top of at least a portion of the screen 5002 and may, for example, be removably attached to the screen 5002. For example, the touch screen 5004 may be compatible with multiple screens and may be removably attached and disconnected from at least one screen. In addition, in some embodiments, the touch screen 5004 may be an independent screen that can operate independently of the screen 5002. For example, a detachable LCD screen may include a touch screen 5004, and a detachable LCD screen may overlap at least a portion of the screen 5002. In other embodiments, the touch screen 5004 may be integrated in the screen 5002. In the touch screen 5004, for example, resistive technology, capacitive technology, ultrasonic beam technology, and / or proximity technology can be used. Monoparental visualization.

As shown primarily in FIG. 93, in various embodiments, a feedback controller 5016 may exchange signals with a surgical instrument 5020, an endoscope 5018, and / or a screen 5002. In some embodiments, a wired and / or wireless connection 5017 between a feedback controller 5016 and an endoscope 5018 may serve to transmit feedback communication in the form of a video image from the endoscope 5018 to the feedback controller 5016. In addition, a wired and / or wireless connection 5019 between the feedback controller 5016 and the surgical instrument 5020 and / or the microcontroller of the surgical instrument 5020 can serve to transmit feedback data measured and / or detected by the surgical device 5020 to the feedback controller 5016. For example, various sensors are described in this document, as well as in Zemlock ‘263 and Zemlock описание 344, the description of which is fully included in this document, and various sensors can detect feedback and / or instrument status information. In addition, a wired and / or wireless connection 5015 between the feedback controller 5016 and the screen 5002 can serve to transmit feedback data from the surgical instrument 5020 and / or feedback in the form of video from the endoscope 5018 to the screen 5002. In at least one an embodiment, feedback in the form of a video image can be displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002, and feedback data can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5004. In embodiments where a connectable LCD screen containing a touch screen 5004 is located on top of the screen 5002, a wired and / or wireless connection between the feedback controller 5016 and a detachable LCD screen can, for example, transmit feedback data to a detachable LCD screen and / or LCD screen to 5010 feedback controller.

As shown primarily in FIG. 76, screen 5002 may broadcast a first information layer 5010, which may comprise, for example, feedback in the form of video from an endoscope 5018 (FIG. 93). In various cases, the video feedback 5010 may include an image of a surgical instrument 5020 acting on tissue T. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 5020 may be similar to, for example, surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1), and a disposable loading unit ( BSS) and / or end effector 5022 associated with a surgical instrument may be similar, for example, to loading block 20 (FIG. 2). The OZB 5022 of the surgical instrument 5020 can pivot about tissue T, grab and / or grip tissue T between a pair of branches, staple tissue T with brackets, and / or cut tissue T with a cutting element as described herein. In addition, the endoscope 5018, which can be located on the surgical field and / or adjacent to it, can view the OZB 5022 and can transmit a video signal and / or recording to the feedback controller 5016 (FIG. 93). In various embodiments, video feedback in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002 may be visual feedback allowing the user of the surgical instrument 5020 to see the surgical field in real time.

As shown primarily in FIG. 77, a second information layer 5012 can be displayed on the screen 5002. In addition, the user can select, move, resize, reduce, stretch, resize and / or perform other actions with respect to the second information layer 5012. For example, the user can work with the second information layer 5012 by interacting with a touch screen 5004. As described herein, the second information layer 5012 may include feedback data from a surgical instrument 5020 and / or monitor the control of the surgeon with a chemical tool 5020. In various embodiments, the second information layer 5012 may include a control panel 5030, and a touch screen 5004 may be used to select and / or use elements of the control panel 5030. The control panel 5030 can be collapsed, resized, moved and / or performed other actions with it via the touch screen 5004. For example, the user can reduce or collapse the control panel 5030 by selecting the reduce / enlarge icon 5032 and can enlarge or expand the control panel 5030 by re-select icon 5032 decrease / increase. In addition, the user can move the control panel 5030 on the screen 5002, for example, by dragging the control panel 5030 on the screen 5002. In addition, the user can resize the control panel 5030 on the screen 5002 by squeezing and / or stretching a plurality of contact points on the touch screen 5004 One skilled in the art will recognize that various conventional and / or intuitive contact elements for interacting with a touch screen 5004 can be used to change and / or control, for example, a second information insulating layer 5012 and / or 5030 control panel.

As shown in FIG. 77, the control panel 5030 may include a plurality of menus, categories, and / or classifications. For example, the control panel 5030 may include a tool feedback menu 5036, a screen menu 5060, and / or a tool controller menu 5070. The user can use the control panel 5030 to select menus and / or to switch between the operational states of the touch screen 5004. For example, the touch screen 5004 can transmit commands and / or control signals to the controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or the instrument microcontroller when the user selects the menu 5070 instrument controller on the control panel 5030. In such embodiments, as described herein, the touch screen 5004 may function in a tool control state. In addition, the settings associated with the second information layer 5012 and / or the screen 5002, for example, can be changed by the user by selecting the screen menu 5060 on the control panel 5030. In such embodiments, the touch screen 5004 may function in a state of changing settings. In addition, or alternatively, the feedback data contained in the second information layer 5012 can be changed by the user by selecting the tool feedback menu 5036. In such embodiments, the touch screen 5004 may function in a feedback control state. In various embodiments, the control panel 5030 may include additional and / or smaller menus, categories, and / or classifications. In addition, various menus, categories, and / or classifications of the control panel 5030 can be changed, for example, according to user preferences. Menus, categories and / or classifications may have a verbal and / or symbolic designation in the second information layer 5012. In various embodiments, the categories in each menu 5036, 5060, 5070 can be selectively displayed in the second information layer 5012. For example, the categories in each menu 5036 , 5060, 5070 can only be displayed in the second information layer 5012 when the user selects the corresponding menu 5036, 5060, 5070 located above. In other embodiments, the user can, for example, manually minimize and / or bring and to the maximum categories and / or subcategories corresponding to each menu 5036, 5060 and / or 5070.

As shown in FIG. 77, the instrument feedback menu 5036 may include many feedback categories and may establish communication with feedback data measured and / or detected by the surgical instrument 5020 (FIG. 93) during surgery. As described herein, a surgical instrument 5020 can detect and / or measure the position of a jaw that is movable between an open position and a closed position, the thickness of the clamped tissue, the clamping force acting on the clamped tissue, articulated rotation of the OZB 5022 and / or, for example, the position, speed and / or force of the trigger element. In addition, the feedback controller 5016 (FIG. 93) exchanging signals with the surgical instrument 5020 can serve to transmit the received feedback to a screen 5002, which can display feedback in the second information layer 5012. As described herein, the selection the placement and / or generation of feedback data displayed in the second information layer 5012 can be changed, for example, based on user input on the touch screen 5004.

In various embodiments, the screen menu 5060 of the control panel 5030 may communicate with a variety of categories, such as, for example, unit systems 5062 and / or data modes 5064. In some embodiments, the user can select the category 5062 unit systems for switching between unit systems, for example, between metric units and a unit and measure system based on the imperial system. In addition, the user can select the category 5064 data modes for switching between the types of numeric representations (FIG. 79-81) of the feedback data and / or, for example, between the types of graphical representations (FIG. 82-83) of the feedback data. Numeric representations of feedback data may be displayed, for example, as numerical values and / or percentages. In addition, graphical representations of the feedback data may be displayed, for example, as a function of time (FIG. 82) and / or distance (FIG. 83). As described herein, the user can select the tool controller menu 5070 on the control panel 5030 to enter commands for the surgical tool 5020 (FIG. 93), which can be implemented, for example, by the instrument controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or microcontroller .

As shown in FIG. 78, the second information layer 5012 may overlap at least a portion of the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. In addition, the touch screen 5004 allows the user to control the second information layer 5012 with respect to feedback in the form of a video image in the first information layer 5010 below the screen 5002. For example, the user can use the touch screen 5004 to select, control, change the format, resize and / or otherwise change the information displayed in the second information layer 5012. In In some embodiments, the user can use the touch screen 5004 to control the second information layer 5012 relative to the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. The user can, for example, select the menu, category and / or classification of the control panel 5030, and the second information the layer 5012 and / or the control panel 5030 are adapted to reflect the user's choice. In various embodiments, the user can select a category from the instrument feedback category 5036 that corresponds to a specific element or elements of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010. The feedback corresponding to the user selected category can be moved, positioned and / or “snap” to the position on the screen 5002 relative to a specific element or elements of the surgical instrument 5020. For example, the selected feedback may move in Assumption near and / or in position to be overlapped on a particular element or elements of the surgical instrument 5020 that are displayed in the first information layer 5010.

As shown in FIG. 79 and 80, when the user selects, for example, the category 5040 for promoting the scalpel from the tool feedback menu 5036, the received data and / or information related to the advancement of the scalpel can move and / or “snap” to the position in the second information layer 5012 relative to the OZB scalpel 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010. Additionally, the control panel 5030 may be minimized and / or reduced thereafter. how the user selected the desired category or categories from the tool feedback menu 5036. Feedback data 5052 related to the advancement of the scalpel can be displayed on the screen 5002 next to the detected OZB 5022 scalpel displayed in the first information layer 5010, and can move, for example, between the first position (FIG. 79) when the scalpel is closer to the beginning the starting stroke, and the second position (FIG. 80), when the scalpel is closer to the distal end of the starting stroke, with translational movement and / or movement of the scalpel through the OZB 5022. For example, with translational movement of the scalpel at a distance of X mm d nnye 5052 relating to the promotion of a scalpel, can be placed in a first position (FIG. 79) and in translation by a distance Y scalpel mm data 5052 relating to the promotion of a scalpel, can be placed in the second position (FIG. 80). In such embodiments, the operator can track the progress of the scalpel during the start-up by reading the feedback data 5052 on the screen 5002. For example, the end effector branches 5024 and / or tissue T block the visibility of the OZB 5022 scalpel, for example, the operator can track and / or approximately accurately determine the position of the scalpel in the OZB 5020 based on the change in the value of the feedback data 5052 and / or the offset position of the feedback data 5052 relative to the OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010 below. ohm, the screen 5002 may include a numeric representation of the promotion of a scalpel, and pictographic and / or symbolic representation of the promotion of a scalpel. For example, a symbol 5054, such as an arrow, may move and / or pass relative to the BSS 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010 below, to demonstrate the movement of the scalpel through the BSS 5022. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 and 80, symbol 5054 may extend distally when the scalpel extends distally, for example, from a position near the start of the start-up stroke (FIG. 79) to a position near the distal end of the start-up stroke (FIG. 80).

In various embodiments, the user can select one or more different feedback data categories from the tool feedback menu 5036, and different categories of feedback data can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5002. In such embodiments, when the user selecting a different feedback data category from the tool feedback menu 5036, the numerical and / or symbolic representation of the feedback data can move accordingly the position on the screen 5002 relative to the OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010 below. For example, when the user selects category 5038 the jaw position from the tool feedback menu 5036, the feedback data relating to the jaw position made to move between the open position and the clamped position, can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and, for example, can move to a position next to the performed (s) with the ability to move the branches (s) 5024 of the surgical tool 5020 on the screen 5002. In addition, when you select the category 5042 scalpel speed feedback data 5058 (FIG. 82), related to the speed of the scalpel, can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can move to the position next to the scalpel in the OZB 5022 on the screen 5002 similarly to the numeric data 5052 and / or symbol 5054 described above. When a user selects a fabric thickness category 5044, feedback information related to the detected fabric thickness can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and, for example, can be moved to a position next to the measured fabric T on the screen 5002. In addition, in at least one In an embodiment, the second information layer 5012 may include a scale and / or ruler that may indicate the detected tissue thickness. The user can move the ruler through the touch screen 5004 relative to the underlying fabric T displayed in the first information layer 5010, which can help the user, for example, evaluate changes in tissue thickness. When the user selects the 5046 articulated rotation of the end effector, the feedback data 5252 (FIG. 84-88) related to the articulated rotation of the OZB 5022 can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can be moved, for example, to the position next to the articulated joint 5026 (FIG. 84 and 85) OZB 5022 on the screen 5002. When the user selects the trigger force category 5048, the feedback data related to the trigger force exerted by the scalpel on the tissue can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can be located, for example measures near scalpel EHS 5022 on the screen 5002. In addition, feedback information relating to the trigger force applied scalpel, can be moved in the second information layer 5012 while moving relatively scalpel EHS 5022, such as during start-up speed. In addition, when selecting the clamping force category 5050, the feedback data 5158 (FIG. 83) related to the clamping force acting on the fabric T can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can be moved next to the BSS 5022 displayed in the first information below layer 5010. In such embodiments, the feedback data 5158 related to the clamping force may vary in terms of the clamping pressure along the length and / or width of the BHA 5022, for example, during clamping and / or during the start-up stroke.

In various embodiments, the feedback displayed in the second information layer 5012 can move with the corresponding element of the surgical instrument 5020 in the first information layer 5010. For example, when moving the OZB 5022 through the surgical field, the OZB 5022 can move around the screen 5002. In such embodiments the feedback related to the OZB 5022, for example, such as the position of the jaws and / or the articulation data, can move together with the OZB 5022. Moving the corresponding feedback can It means that the feedback remains in the operator’s field of view, while the operator does not need to take his eyes off the corresponding element of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. In addition, the movement of the corresponding feedback ensures that the feedback does not block the element (s) of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed (s) in the first information layer 5010, which it is desirable for the operator to see on the screen 5002.

In some embodiments, a user may select multiple feedback categories for viewing on the screen 5002 simultaneously. In addition, the selected feedback, or feedback types, is configured to be automatically displayed on the screen 5002 to display relevant data without overlapping in the second information layer 5012. In other words, the feedback displayed in the second information layer 5012 may not overlap with another feedback displayed in the second information layer 5012; however, such feedback may be superimposed, for example, on the feedback in the form of a video image of the first information layer 5010 displayed on the screen 5002. In various embodiments, when moving and / or “linking” the feedback data to a position on the screen relative to the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010 below, the user can correct the default position by “dragging” the feedback data to any other place in the second information layer 5012 f.

As shown in FIG. 81, a symbolic representation 5056 of a scalpel advancement, for example, such as a cross, a target, and / or a pictographic representation of a scalpel and / or scalpel blade, can move to a position in the second information layer 5012, which is superimposed on the position of the scalpel displayed in the first information layer 5010. In some embodiments, even if the scalpel is not visible on the screen 5002, for example, if the scalpel is hidden, the symbolic representation 5056 of the scalpel can move and / or follow in the detected the position of the scalpel in the OZB 5022 on the screen 5002. For example, the symbolic representation 5056 may be in a first position relative to the OZB 5022 near the start of the starting stroke, and the symbolic representation 5056 is moved to the second position relative to the OZB 5022 near the end of the starting stroke.

In various embodiments, the feedback selected by the user through the touch screen 5004 may “snap” to a corner, edge, and / or other predetermined points on the screen 5002. For example, as shown in FIG. 81, numerical data 5052 related to the advancement of the scalpel can be moved to the corner of the screen 5002. In addition, or alternatively, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move the numerical data 5052 to another position on the touch screen 5004. Based on the position of the surgical instrument 5020 located lower in the first information layer 5010, the user can move the numerical data 5052 to a position in the second information layer 5012 so that the numerical data 5052 does not block and / or do not overlap the corresponding and / or a specific element of the BSS 5022. In addition, or alternatively, the user can move the numerical data 5052 to a position next to the corresponding element of the BSS 5022 so that the user can easily view the corresponding element of the BSS 5022 and the numeric data 5052 at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 84 and 85, a symbolic representation 5254 (FIG. 85) of the feedback data received from the feedback controller 5016 (FIG. 93) may be included in the second information layer 5012. For example, a symbolic representation 5254 of the articulated rotation of the OZB 5022, for example, such as a contractible angle and / or arc, can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can move to a position on the screen 5002 near and / or over the articulated joint 5026 of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010. For example, the contractible arc can it can pass between the axis A formed by OZB 5022 without pivoting (FIG. 84) and the axis A ’formed by OZB 5022 with pivoting (FIG. 85). In some embodiments, even if the articulation 5026 is not displayed on the screen, the symbolic representation 5254 of the articulation angle can be displayed in the second information layer 5012. For example, if the articulation 5026 is not installed within the field of view of the endoscope and / or is limited or blocked, the symbolic the articulation angle representation 5254 may provide a visual indication of the articulation for the user. In various embodiments, the symbolic representation 5252 may be adjusted and / or changed by moving and / or pivoting the OZB 5022. For example, the symbolic representation 5254 may be in the form of an arrow or line shown by the arrow, which may extend from the initial position and / or position of the OZB 5022 without the articulated rotation (FIG. 84) to the position of the OZB 5022 with the articulated rotation (FIG. 85), as detected by the tool 5020. In addition, in various embodiments, the symbolic representation 5254 may “snap” to the position iju relatively EHS 5022 displayed in the first information layer so that a symbolic representation 5254 is superimposed and / or combined with EHS 5022. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 85, the symbolic representation 5254 of the articulation angle can be moved to and / or to a position adjacent to the articulation 5026 displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002, and can be stretched between the axis A formed by the OZB 5022 in the initial position and / or without swivel rotation, and the axis A 'formed by the OZB 5022 when the swivel rotation of the OZB 5022.

In addition, in various embodiments, numerical data 5252 related to swiveling the OZB 5022 can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5002. In addition, data 5252 can be changed by swiveling the OZB 5022. For example, the second information layer 5012 can display swivel rotation X ° to the swivel rotation of the OZB 5022 (FIG. 84) and can display the swivel rotation Y ° after the swivel rotation of the OZB 5022 (FIG. 85). In various embodiments, the pivot feedback data 5252 of the OZB 5022 can be displayed in the second information layer 5012, for example, on and / or adjacent to the articulated joint 5026 of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010. The user can use the touch screen 5004 to moving, resizing, decreasing and / or performing other actions with the articulated rotation data 5252 displayed in the second information layer 5012, for example, regarding feedback in the video image displayed in the first information layer 5010. In addition, or alternatively, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move the symbolic representation 5254 and / or numeric data 5252 to another position on the touch screen 5004. Based on the position of the surgical instrument 5020 located below in the first information layer 5010, the user can move the numerical data 5252 to a position in the second information layer 5012 so that the numerical data 5252 does not block and / or do not overlap the definition single element (s) OZB 5022. In addition, or alternatively, the user can move the numeric data 5252 to a position next to the corresponding element (s) OZB 5022 so that the user can easily view the corresponding ( -share) element (s) OZB 5022 and numerical data 5252 at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 82, a graphical representation can be selected from the screen menu 5060 of the control panel 5030, for example, using a touch screen 5004. In such embodiments, a graphical representation of the feedback 5058 can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5002. The user can select a graphical representation for viewing the measured and / or acquired data of a surgical instrument 5020 and / or its controller with respect to time and / or spatial position. For example, the user wants to monitor the speed of the starting element throughout the entire starting stroke, and for this he can select the category 5042 of the scalpel speed (FIG. 78) from the tool feedback menu 5036 (FIG. 78). In such embodiments, a graphical representation of the scalpel speed 5058 may, for example, continue to receive reference points and grow during the launch stroke. In various embodiments, upon completion of the starting stroke, a graphical representation 5058 may display a soft start period 5057 and / or a scalpel soft stop period 5059. In addition, a graphical representation 5058 can be installed on the screen 5002 so that the scalpel speed at a specific location along the length of the end effector branch 5024 corresponds to a specific location along the length of the end effector branch 5022 that is displayed in the first information layer 5010. For example, a graphical representation of 5058 may start at the beginning and / or in close proximity to the beginning of the path of the scalpel through the OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010, and can end at the end and / or in the immediate the proximity to the end of the path of the scalpel through the OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010. In addition, as described herein, the graphical representation 5058 can be “snapped” to the corresponding position on the screen, and the user can use the touch screen 5004, for example, to move and / or resize the graphical representation of 5058 as desired. In some embodiments, a numerical representation of the starting speed may be displayed in the second information layer 5012 together with a graphical representation 5058.

As shown in FIG. 83, in various embodiments, the user may need to observe the clamping force acting on the tissue T along the length and / or width of the end effector branch 5024, and for this he can select the clamping force category 5050 (FIG. 78) from the reverse menu 5036 communication tool (FIG. 78). In such embodiments, a graphical representation 5158 of the clamping force may be displayed in the second information layer 5012. In some embodiments, a graphical representation 5158 may be located in the second information layer 5012 relative to the clamped fabric displayed in the first information layer 5010. For example, the graphical representation 5158 may begin at the beginning and / or in close proximity to the beginning of the proximal end, branch 5024 displayed in the first information layer 5010, and can end at the end and / or in close proximity to the end of the distal end of the jaw 5024 displayed in the first information layer 5010. In addition, as described herein, the graphical representation 5158 can be “snapped” to the corresponding position on the screen, and the user can use the touch screen 5004, for example, to move and / or resize the graphical representation 5158. In some embodiments, the graphical representation may change during use, for example, to display changes in the clamp and during the start-up progress.

As shown in FIG. 86-88, in various embodiments, a user can interact with a touch screen 5004 to enter control commands and / or directions for a surgical instrument 5020 via an instrument controller 5016 and / or a microcontroller. For example, a user may enter control commands for pivoting the OZB 5022 by clamping the end effector branches 5024, pulling and / or pulling the cutting element and / or pushing the brackets out of the OZB 5022. In various embodiments, the user can select the tool controller category 5070 from the control panel 5030 via the touch screen 5004 to activate the instrument control state so that the user can control the surgical instrument 5020 via the touch screen 5004. When the sensor is activated the touch screen 5004 for controlling the instrument, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to control the surgical instrument 5020. For example, the user can interact with the control buttons and / or icons in the second information layer 5012 and / or can interact with the points on the touch screen 5004 that correspond located below the surgical instrument 5020, for entering commands for the surgical instrument 5020.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004, for example, to indicate the desired direction and swivel angle of the OZB 5022. In some embodiments, the user can drag a contact point on the touch screen 5004 from the OZB 5022 and / or a nearby point to the location of the desired swivel end turn effector 5002. As shown in FIG. 86, a user may draw a line or arc 5352 from the OZB 5022 and / or a nearby point depicted in the first information layer 5010 to the desired articulated rotation of the OZB 5022. For example, the arc 5352 may extend from and / or approximately from the axis A formed by the OZB 5022, and the arc 5352 may extend up to the axis A ′ defined by the BZB 5022 in the desired articulated rotation position. In addition, the arc 5352 may extend, for example, in the direction indicated by arrow 5354. In some embodiments, the arc 5352 may not be displayed in the second information layer 5010 when the user enters the desired hinge rotation through the touch screen 5004. In various embodiments, the touch screen 5004 can transmit the desired angle of articulation to the controller 5016 tool (FIG. 93) and / or microcontroller, which can perform articulated rotation OZB 5022 at the desired angle of articulation. As shown in FIG. 88, the instrument controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or the microcontroller can pivot the OZB 5022 to the A axis ’, for example, based on user input via the touch screen 5004.

As shown primarily in FIG. 87, in various embodiments, a user can act on control buttons, circuits, and / or icons in a first information layer 5012 to transmit commands to a surgical instrument 5020. For example, the first information layer 5012 may include a symbol or icon 5356, and the user can move and / or control the icon 5356 to pivot the OZB 5022. In various embodiments, the icon 5356 may include, for example, an OZB 5022 circuit. In addition, the user can drag the icon 5356 to the position arnirnogo rotation and / or rotated position for pivoting the EHS 5022. In various embodiments, the line and / or arc 5358 can include the direction and / or the degree of pivoting required for the user. For example, the arc 5358 may extend from the position of the icon 5356 without pivoting to the position of the icon 5356 ’with a pivoting. The articulated pivot badge 5356 ’may correspond, for example, to the desired articulated pivot of the OZB 5022. As shown in FIG. 88, the tool controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller can pivot the OZB 5022 to the axis A ′, for example, based on user input via the touch screen 5004. For example, the OZB 5022 can be pivoted at a contractible angle formed by an arc 5358 between the 5356 icon without the hinge pivot and 5356 'pivot pivot icon as shown in FIG. 87.

As shown primarily in FIG. 89 and 90, in various embodiments, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to instruct the surgical instrument 5020 to close the jaw 5024. In some embodiments, the user can drag the contact point on the touch screen 5004 from the junction 5024 and / or a nearby point to the closed position, capable of moving the jaw 5024, to initiate the closure of the jaw 5024. For example, the user can draw a line or arc 5362 (FIG. 89) from a movable jaw 5024 and / or a nearby point displayed in the first information layer 5010 to a place of a desired closing position made to move a jaw 5024. In various embodiments, the touch screen 5004 may transmit a closing motion to the controller 5016 tools and / or microcontrollers that can perform closing of the executed (s) with the ability to move the branches (branches) 5024. In some embodiments, the implementation of the arc 5362, drawn by the user on Sep Orn screen 5004, may extend from and / or about the axis A, formed by the moveable jaws 5024 and 5362 arc may extend to the axis A '(FIG. 90), formed configured to move the jaws 5024 in the desired clamped position. In addition, the arc 5362 may extend, for example, in the direction indicated by arrow 5364. As shown in FIG. 90, the instrument controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller may influence the closure of the movable jaw 5024 relative to the A axis ’, for example, based on user input via the touch screen 5004.

As shown in FIG. 91 and 92, in various embodiments, a user may act on control buttons and / or icons in a first information layer 5012 to transmit commands to a surgical instrument 5020. For example, the first information layer 5012 may include a control interface 5072, which may include buttons 5074, 5075, 5076, 5077, 5078 to enter commands for the controller 5016 tool and / or microcontroller. The buttons for transmitting commands to the tool controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or the microcontroller may relate, for example, to swivel the OZB 5022, close and / or compress the jaw 5024, push and / or pull the cutting element and / or push the brackets out of the OZB 5022 A user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to select a button or buttons via a control interface 5072. As shown primarily in FIG. 91, the control interface 5072 may include a stop / retract button 5474, a temporary stop button 5475, a start button 5476, an acceleration button 5477 and / or a deceleration button 5478. The user may, for example, act on the start button 5476 to initiate a start stroke and / or extend the start element, the temporary stop button 5475 to pause the start stroke, and / or the stop / retract button 5474 to stop the start stroke and retract the start element. In addition, the user can interact with the control interface 5072 to control the speed of the trigger element during the launch stroke. For example, the user can act on the acceleration button 5477 to increase the speed of the trigger element, and the user can act on the acceleration button 5478 to reduce the speed of the trigger element. The user can, for example, increase the speed of the starting element after and / or during the soft start phase of the starting stroke, and can, for example, reduce the speed of the starting element in the phase of the soft stop of the starting stroke towards the end of the starting stroke. In other embodiments, the control interface 5072 may include buttons and / or controls, for example, to change the closing of the jaw 5024 and / or hinge the OZB 5022. In various embodiments, the control interface 5072 may be “tied” to a position in the second information layer 5012 when selecting the menu of the tool controller 5070 on the control panel 5030 and / or when selecting a tool control state by another user. The user can, for example, move, adjust and / or control the control interface 5072 relative to the first information layer 5010 and / or screen 5002.

In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 92, the second information layer 5012 may include an advance line 5480, which may, for example, indicate the position of the trigger element in the OZB 5022. The advance line 5480 may extend between the proximal end 5482 and the distal end 5488 and may form the most proximal position and the most distal position starting element during the starting stroke. In various embodiments, for example, an indication of the position of the trigger element along the advance line 5480 may be provided. In some embodiments, the user can use the controls on the control interface 5072 to control the starting stroke. For example, the user can interact with the control interface 5072 to start and / or stop the phases of the soft start and / or soft stop of the starting stroke based on the specified position of the starting element along the line 5480 advance. In addition, the advance line 5480 may include a measuring scale and / or guides 5484, 5486, which can be set to positions along the advance line 5480, where, for example, phases of soft start and / or soft stop can begin and end. Guides 5484, 5486 can serve for the user, for example, as a visual indicator of the start and / or end of the soft start period using the acceleration button 5077 and / or the soft stop phase using the deceleration button 5078 during the starting stroke. In various embodiments, the position of the guides 5484, 5486 can be predefined by the user.

As shown in FIG. 92, in various embodiments, the tool controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller can automatically influence changes in the speed of the trigger element based on the position of the guides 5484, 5486 along the advance line 5480. In addition, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move and / or control the progress bar 5480, and thus to change the phases of the soft start and / or soft stop of the starting stroke. For example, phases of a soft start and / or soft stop can be set in predetermined positions along the advance line 5480 between the proximal end 5482 and the distal end 5488. In some embodiments, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move and / or adjust the position of the guides 5484, 5486 along the line of 5480 promotion. For example, the user can translate the guides 5484, 5486 between a plurality of positions on the advance line 5480 by pulling and / or releasing the guides 5484, 5486 to extend and / or shorten the phases of the soft start and / or soft stop of the starting stroke. In some embodiments, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move and / or adjust the position of the distal end 5488 of the advance line 5480 to extend and / or shorten the start stroke. For example, the user can drag the distal end 5488 proximal to shorten the start-up stroke and / or, for example, can drag the distal end 5488 distally to extend the start-up stroke. In various embodiments, the tool controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller can adjust the speed of the trigger element and / or the length of the trigger stroke, for example, by changing the positions of the guides 5484, 5486 and / or the distal end 5488 along the line 5480 advance.

In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 10 may include at least one shutdown mechanism. As described in more detail herein, such a shutdown mechanism may prevent the unauthorized use of the surgical instrument by the end user. For example, in FIG. 134 shows a power supply 2500. The power source 2500 can be used to supply power to a surgical instrument, such as, for example, a surgical instrument 10 (see FIG. 1), and it is in many respects similar to other power sources described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example , power supply 200 (see FIG. 1), and other power supplies of the type described in more detail in Zemlok '763 publication, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. To protect the power source 2500 from unauthorized use, the power source 2500 may be configured to become inoperative or inactive in the event of unauthorized use. For example, power supply 2500 may become inactive, for example, by stopping the reception, storage, and / or transmission of energy. Protection against unauthorized use may ensure proper operation of the power supply 2500 during use with the surgical instrument 10.

As shown in FIG. 134 and 135, the power supply 2500 may include an outer casing 2502, which may cover various components of the power supply 2500, such as, for example, a battery 2510. The casing 2502 may include a first casing 2504 and a second casing 2506, which may be connected with the possibility of detachment with the first shell 2504, as shown in FIG. 135. In some examples, the sheaths 2504 and 2506 may be formed from a thermoplastic material, such as, for example, polycarbonate. Alternatively, other materials having appropriate characteristics may be used. In addition, the sheaths 2504 and 2506 can be connected to each other by one or more attachment methods, such as, for example, gluing, welding, using fastening structures and / or screws. In one example, the sheaths 2504 and 2506 may be attached to each other by engagement in the manner of a locking joint. In another example, sheaths 2504 and 2506 may be attached to each other via fasteners 2508, as shown in FIG. 135.

As shown in FIG. 135-137, the power supply 2500 may include a shutdown mechanism 2512, which may cause the power supply 2500 to become inoperative if the power supply 2500 is violated. For example, the shutdown mechanism 2512 may cause the power supply 2500 to become inoperative when the case 2502 is used unauthorized. As shown in FIG. 135-137, the shutdown mechanism 2512 may comprise a circuit 2514, which may include a breakable portion 2516 (see FIG. 136). In some examples, the tear portion 2516 may be formed of a conductive material that can be easily torn. As shown in FIG. 136, circuit 2514 may be coupled to battery 2510 and may allow current to flow as long as torn portion 2516 remains intact. Gap torn section 2516, as shown in FIG. 137 may interrupt circuit 2514, thereby interrupting the flow of current passing through it. In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 135, the circuit 2514 may be located so that the torn portion 2516 may break when the first sheath 2504 and the second sheath 2506 are separated from each other, which may result in the inability of the power source 2500 to receive, store and / or supply power to the surgical instrument 10 without application considerable effort to repair the broken chain 2514.

As shown in FIG. 135, the power supply 2500 may comprise one or more battery cells depending on the current requirements of the tool 10. In various aspects, the power supply 2500 may include a battery, such as, for example, a battery 2510, which may include a plurality of battery cells that can be connected to each other in series. Power source 2500 may be replaceable. In some aspects, the power supply 2500 may include a rechargeable battery (e.g., lead-based, nickel-based, lithium-based, etc.). The battery cells may be, for example, 3-volt lithium battery cells, such as battery cells CR 123A, although other types of battery cells (including battery cells with different voltage levels and / or different levels may be used in other embodiments). chemical reactions). The user can disconnect and remove the depleted power source 2500 from the surgical instrument 10 and replace it with a charged power source 2500. Subsequently, the depleted 2500 power supply can be recharged and reused. It is also contemplated that the power supply 2500 may include at least one disposable battery. In various aspects, the voltage of a disposable battery may range from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. The user can disconnect and remove the depleted disposable power source 2500 and connect a new disposable power source 2500 to power the surgical instrument 10.

As described above, the power supply 2500 may include rechargeable battery cells and may, for example, be removably housed within a handle portion 14 of the housing 12 (see FIG. 1). In such circumstances, the power supply 2500 can be charged using a charger base, which may include a power supply for charging the power supply 2500. A shutdown mechanism, such as, for example, a shutdown mechanism 2512, can be used to prevent recharging of the power supply 2500 through the base of the charger when unauthorized use of the power supply 2500, as described above. For example, circuit 2514 may be coupled to a battery 2510 and may be coupled to the base of the charger to allow the base of the charger to recharge the battery 2510. As described above, the tear portion 2516 (see FIG. 135) may break separating the first shell 2504 from the second shell 2506, thereby interrupting the current flow through circuit 2514, which may prevent recharging of the battery 2510 from the base of the charger. This may be an advantage that prevents the unauthorized use of the power source 2500 by the end user, since the unauthorized use of the power source 2500 can lead to the inability to recharge it for subsequent use with the surgical tool 10.

As shown in FIG. 138-141, power supply 2500 may include a data storage unit, such as, for example, memory 2552, which can store data, including information about power supply 2500, such as, for example, available full charge, number of uses, and / or performance . In addition, memory 2552 can store data about the surgical instrument 10, including various information regarding the operation of the surgical instrument 10 during surgery, such as, for example, the readings of various sensors, the number of starts, the number of cassettes used and / or information about the treated patients. Memory 2552 may include any means for storing software, including, without limitation, ROM (read-only memory), RAM (random access memory), EPROM (programmable ROM), EEPROM (electrically erasable EPROM) and / or other computer-readable media .

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 138-141, the power supply 2500 may include a data access portal, such as, for example, an I / O interface 2550, to provide access to data stored in the memory 2552. For example, the I / O interface 2550 may allow data loading, stored in the memory of 2552 power source 2500, to an external computer device for evaluation and analysis. In certain circumstances, the I / O interface 2550 may be a wired interface and may be operatively coupled to a shutdown mechanism 2512, which may include a disconnect, which may serve to prevent data transmission through the I / O interface 2550. Similarly to the torn portion 2516 of the shut-off mechanism 2512, the break-off connection of the shut-off mechanism 2554 can be arranged so that it can break when the casing 2502 breaks, such as, for example, when the first shell 2504 and the second shell 2506 are separated from each other.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 139-141, the I / O interface 2550 may include a connector 2555, which may be configured to receive a corresponding connector 2556 from an external computer device, for example, to enable data transfer between the memory 2552 and the computer device. In addition, the connector 2554 may be protected by a cover, such as, for example, a swing cover 2559, which may be movable between a locked position (see FIG. 139) in which the connector 2554 is closed and an unlocked position (see FIG. 140), in which the connector 2554 is open to receive the corresponding connector 2556. In one example, a screw 2558 can be used to attach the swing cap 2559 to the housing 2502. In the present description, other means for reversibly coating the spruce 2556. In addition to the above, in some examples, the connectors 2554 and 2556 may include key-type interaction in the lock, and the connectors 2554 and 2556 may have, for example, unique complementary geometric shapes that prevent the connector 2554 from accepting other connectors to prevent or at least restrict unauthorized access to data stored in memory 2552. In some examples, connector 2554 may be located within enclosure 2502, as shown in FIG. 141 to further limit unauthorized access to data stored in memory 2552. In such circumstances, the connector 2554 may be accessible by separating the first shell 2504 from the second shell 2506 of the housing 2502. However, as described in more detail above, the shutdown mechanism 2512 may break if the housing is broken 2502 cause the power supply 2500 to be inoperative, which may further impede attempts to open connector 2554 to gain access to data stored in memory 2552.

As shown in FIG. 142, power supply 2500 may include a processor 2560 that can control data stored in memory 2552. To protect such data from unauthorized access, processor 2560 may be coupled to a gap determination mechanism 2562. For example, processor 2560 may be coupled to circuit 2514 and may be configured to detect a gap in a tear portion 2516. In one example, a gap determination mechanism 2562 may include one or more sensors configured to detect a gap in a case 2502. In any case, processor 2560 can be programmed after detecting a gap to prevent unauthorized access to data stored in memory 2552, for example, by deleting or encoding data.

In FIG. 143-145, surgical instrument 2600 is shown. Surgical instrument 2600 is in many respects similar to surgical instrument 10 (see FIG. 1) and / or surgical instrument 2100 (see FIG. 146). For example, the surgical instrument 2600 may include a body assembly 2602, which is similar to the surgical instrument 2100 body assembly 2102 and / or the surgical instrument body 12. In addition, the surgical instrument 2600 may include a power source 2500 ′ that can be used to supply power supply to the surgical instrument 2600 and which in many respects is similar to other power supplies, which are described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, Power 2500 (see. FIG. 134) and other power sources of the type which is described in more detail in the publication Zemlok '763, fully incorporated herein by reference. In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, the 2500 ’power supply may include a charge level indicator 2660, which may be configured to provide the user with feedback on the charge level of the 2500’ power supply. Feedback can be provided, for example, in sound and / or light form. A 2500 ’power supply may include one or more LEDs. The processor 2560 may, for example, be programmed to monitor the LEDs to provide feedback to the user about the charge level of the 2500 ’power supply, which can be measured, for example, using a charge meter.

As shown in FIG. 143-145, the power supply 2500 'may include a first LED 2662 and a second LED 2664. A processor 2560 may be coupled to LEDs 2662 and 2664 and may be programmed to illuminate both LEDs 2662 and 2664 after receiving a full charge signal from the charge meter power supply. In addition, processor 2560 can be programmed to turn off both LEDs 2662 and 2664 after receiving a signal from the charge meter indicating that the power source is completely discharged. In addition, processor 2560 can be programmed to illuminate only the first LED 2662, but not the second LED 2664, after receiving from the charge meter a signal that the power source is sufficiently charged to perform only one full operation of the surgical instrument 2600. In the present description, other means to notify the user of the charge level of the 2500 'power supply.

In some embodiments, the various components of the surgical instrument 10 may be reusable, for example, and the various components may be replaceable. In addition, the surgical instrument 10 can be at least partially assembled, disassembled and / or reassembled. For example, the surgical instrument 10 can be at least partially disassembled and reassembled using, for example, reusable components and interchangeable components. In addition, between surgical interventions, surgical instrument 10 can be at least partially disassembled for cleaning, disinfection and / or treatment for reuse. After that, the surgical instrument 10 can, for example, be reassembled. As described in more detail herein, various elements, assemblies, and / or systems of a surgical instrument 10 may facilitate disassembly and assembly. For example, in FIG. 146-148, surgical instrument 2100 is shown. Surgical instrument 2100 is in many respects similar to surgical instrument 10 (see FIG. 1). For example, the surgical instrument 2100 may include a body assembly 2102 that is similar to the body 12 of the surgical instrument 10. In addition, the body assembly 2102 may include several detachable components 2103 that can be detachably connected to the body part 2104, such such as operating unit 2106. Other components of the housing unit 2102 can be detachably attached to the housing part 2104. For example, the housing assembly 2102 may include a removable power supply 2108 that can be detachably connected to the handle portion 2110 of the housing part 2104. The power supply 2108 is in many respects similar to other power supplies described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as for example, a power supply 200 (see FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 147, housing assembly 2102, or some or all of its components, may be reusable. In other words, the housing unit 2102, or some or all of its components, can be used in a variety of surgical interventions, and cleaning, disinfection and / or treatment may be required between surgical interventions to reuse the housing unit 2102. The ability to reversibly disassemble the housing unit 2102 or remove some or all of its components, such as, for example, the operating unit 2106, in a simple and reproducible way can simplify the steps of cleaning, disinfecting and / or processing to reuse the housing unit 2012 and / or can reduce the cost.

As shown in FIG. 147, the housing assembly 2102 can be disassembled after surgery, and the components of the disassembled housing assembly 2102, such as, for example, the housing part 2104, the operating assembly 2106 and / or the power supply 2110, can be cleaned, sanitized and / or treated for reuse each individually or in combination with other components, depending on the characteristics and internal parts of each component. In some examples, the housing part 2104 may be disposable. In other words, the housing assembly 2102 can be disassembled after surgery, and the housing part 2104 can be replaced with a new housing part 2104. However, the remaining components can be cleaned, disinfected and / or processed for reuse, and then attached to the new housing part 2104. The reader will understand that other components of the housing assembly 2102 can also be disposable and can be replaced with new similar components.

As shown in FIG. 146-148, the housing part 2104 may be configured to facilitate assembly and disassembly of the housing assembly 2102 in a simple, predictable, and reproducible manner. For example, the housing part 2104 may include a first protective cover portion 2112 (see FIG. 147) and a second protective cover portion 2114 (see FIG. 146), which may be releasably attached to the first protective cover portion 2112. In one example, portions 2112 and 2114 of the guard can include engagement in the manner of a snap joint. Sections 2112 and 2114 of the protective casing may be configured to pair with each other. In one example, the protective cover portion 2112 may include a plurality of enclosing members 2116 (see FIG. 147), which may be cylindrical in shape and configured to receive respective input elements (not shown) housed in the protective cover portion 2114 in meshing according to the type of locking connection during joint assembly of sections 2112 and 2114 of the protective casing.

In addition to the above, the work unit 2106 may be located in the first section 2112 of the protective casing. As shown in FIG. 147, the second protective cover portion 2114 can be removed to open the operating unit 2106 located in the first protective cover section 2112 to allow the user to remove the operating unit 2106 from the body part 2104. The operating unit 2106, as shown in FIG. 147 may include an engine 2118 that can generate rotational movements to actuate the end effector (for example, the cassette / stop portion of the loading unit 20 shown in FIG. 2). The engine 2118 is in many respects similar to other engines described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, engine 100 (see FIG. 1). In addition, the operating unit 2106 may also include a transmission unit 2120, which may be operatively connected to the engine 2118 and which in many respects is similar to other transmission units described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, the gear unit 170 transmission (see FIG. 5). In addition, the operating unit 2106 may also include a trigger element assembly 2122, which can convert rotational motions generated by the motor 2118 to axial movements that can be transmitted to the end effector via the trigger rod 2124. The trigger element assembly 2122 is in many respects similar to others drive units described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, the trigger element assembly 82.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, the first portion 2112 of the protective cover may include a plurality of compartments configured to receive the operating unit 2106 and located at a certain distance. For example, as shown in FIG. 147, the protective cover portion 2112 may include an engine compartment 2126, which may be spaced apart to accommodate the engine 2118. In some examples, the engine compartment 2126 may be configured to fit the engine 2118 in an installed structure so that ensure assembly accuracy. In addition, engine compartment 2126 may include assembly instructions that may, for example, be cast on the wall of engine compartment 2126 to ensure proper assembly. For example, the side walls of the engine compartment 2126 may be configured to receive the engine 2118 tightly. In addition, the side walls may be asymmetrically configured, in at least some respects, to receive the engine 2118 in only one position, i.e. in the correct position.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 147, the protective housing portion 2112 may include a transmission assembly 2128 that can be positioned at a certain distance to receive the transmission 2120. In addition, in some examples, the transmission assembly 2128 may accommodate the transmission Node 2120 in an installed design to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the compartment 2128 to accommodate the transmission unit can be configured to receive the transmission unit 2120 tightly. In addition, the side walls can be asymmetrically, at least in some respects, to receive the transmission unit 2120 in only one position, t i.e. in the correct position. In addition, the compartment 2128 for housing the transmission assembly may include assembly instructions, which may, for example, be cast on the wall of the compartment 2128 to accommodate the transmission assembly to ensure proper assembly. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 147, the protective cover portion 2112 may include a compartment 2130 for accommodating the trigger element assembly, which may be spaced apart to accommodate the trigger element assembly 2122. In addition, in some examples, the compartment 2130 for accommodating the trigger element assembly may be configured to fit the trigger element assembly 2122 in an installed structure to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the compartment 2130 for accommodating the launch element assembly may be configured to receive the launch element assembly 2122 tightly. In addition, the side walls may be asymmetrically formed, in at least some respects, to receive the trigger assembly 2122 in only one position, i.e., in the correct position. In addition, the compartment 2130 for hosting the launch element assembly may include assembly instructions, which may, for example, be cast on the wall of the compartment 2130 for hosting the launch element assembly to ensure correct assembly. It will become clear to the reader that other components of the operating unit 2106 with compartments for placement with a unique purpose may be offered inside the protective enclosure section 2112. It will also become clear to the reader that the electrical contacts for the components of the operating unit 2106 can also lie in the compartments of the protective housing section 2112 so that after proper assembly between the operating unit 2106, other components of the housing unit 2102, such as, for example, the power supply 2108, and / or other components of the surgical instrument 2100, electrical connections may be made.

In addition to the foregoing, the operating unit 2106 may be detachably coupled to the launch rod 2124, as shown in FIG. 147, which may allow the user to remove and reconnect the work node 2106 as a unit to the surgical instrument 2100 to simplify disassembly and reassembly of the work node 2106. In one example, as shown in FIG. 147, the trigger element assembly 2122 may include a hollow tubular distal portion 2132, which may include a distal opening configured to receive and block to release the proximal portion 2134 of the trigger rod 2124, for example, in meshing engagement.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, other components of the housing unit 2102 may be housed in dedicated compartments in the protective housing portion 2112, similar to operating unit 2106. For example, the protective housing portion 2112 may include a compartment 2136 for receiving a power source that may be located on a specific distance to accommodate power source 2108. In addition, in some examples, the power supply compartment 2136 may be configured to fit the power supply 2108 in an installed structure to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the power supply compartment 2136 may be configured to receive the power source 2108 tightly. In addition, the side walls may be asymmetrically formed, in at least some respects, to receive the power supply 2108 in only one position, i.e., in the correct position. In addition, the power supply compartment 2136 may include assembly instructions, which may, for example, be cast on the wall of the power supply compartment 2136 to ensure proper assembly.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 147 and 148, certain mechanisms of the user input device, such as, for example, the start button 2138 and / or the closing switch 2140, can also be disconnected from the body part 2104, which may include a compartment 2142 for accommodating the start button, which can be located on a certain distance to accommodate the start button 2138, and / or a compartment 2144 for accommodating a closing switch, which may be located at a certain distance, to accommodate the closing switch 2140. In addition, in some The expansion compartment 2142 for accommodating the launch button may be configured to fit the launch button 2138 in the installed structure to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the compartment for accommodating the launch button 2142 can be configured to receive the launch button 2138 tightly. In addition, the side walls can be asymmetrically configured, in at least some respects, to receive the launch button 2138 in only one position, t i.e. in the correct position. Similarly, the closure switch compartment 2144 may be configured to fit the closure switch 2140 in an installed structure to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the closure switch compartment 2144 may be configured to receive the closure switch 2140 tightly. In addition, the side walls may be asymmetrically formed in at least some respects to receive the closure switch 2140 in only one position, t i.e. in the correct position. In addition, compartment 2142 for accommodating the start button and / or compartment 2144 for accommodating the closing switch may include assembly instructions, which may, for example, be cast on the wall of compartment 2142 for accommodating the launch button and / or compartment 2144 for accommodating the closing switch to ensure correct assembly.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, in addition to the accommodation compartments, the protective cover portion 2112 may include fastening mechanism (s) for attaching some or all of the detachable components 2103 of the housing assembly 2102 to their respective compartments to provide that detachable components 2103 remain housed in their respective compartments. Such fastening mechanisms may include fasteners that can be moved between the unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) and the locked configuration (see FIG. 147) to block detachable components 2103 of the housing assembly 2102 in their respective compartments in section 2112 of the protective casing. It will become clear to the reader that one or a plurality of fasteners may be used to attach one or more detachable components 2103 to the protective housing portion 2112. In addition, the fastening mechanisms may also include security elements that can prevent the fasteners from moving into a locked configuration in the event of improper assembly to ensure proper assembly of the detachable components 2103 of the housing assembly 2102. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 147, the operating unit 2106 can be attached to the protective housing portion 2112 by means of several fasteners, such as, for example, an engine fastener 2148, a transmission unit fastener 2150, and / or a starter assembly fastener 2152. In some examples, as shown in FIG. 147, the power supply fastener 2154, the start button fastener 2156, and the closing switch fastener 2158 can be used to connect the power supply 2108, the start button 2138, and the closing switch 2140, respectively.

The fasteners can clamp detachable components 2103 by moving from an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to a locked configuration (see FIG. 147). For example, an engine fastener 2148 may clamp the engine 2118 by moving from an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to a locked configuration (see FIG. 147). In some examples, some or all of the detachable components 2103 may include rails adapted to receive fasteners as they move from an unlocked configuration to a locked configuration. The guides can be arranged so that they can be aligned to receive moving fasteners only when the detachable components 2103 are correctly placed inside their respective compartments in a protective housing portion 2112. For example, if the engine 2118 is not correctly positioned in the engine compartment 2126, the engine fastener 2148 may not be correctly aligned with its guide, and when the engine fastener 2148 is moved from an unlocked configuration to a locked configuration, the engine fastener 2148 may not fit into the guide and, for example may abut against the outer wall of engine 2118. In some examples, engine mount 2148 may be positioned so that it prevents pair engagement ervogo guard portion 2112 with the second guard portion 2114, if the user tries to collect portions of the protective housing 2112 and 2114 in, while the motor attachment member 2148 is not in a locked configuration. This design may notify the user of the need to re-check the assembled components of the housing assembly 2102 for correct assembly.

Similarly to the engine mounting member 2148, the transmission unit mounting member 2150 can be adopted with a guide rail allocated to it on the transmission unit 2120, and the transmission unit mounting member 2150 can be positioned so that it is aligned with its corresponding guide only when the transmission unit 2120 is correctly positioned in compartment 2128 to accommodate the transmission unit. In addition, for example, the fastener 2152 of the starter assembly can be adopted with a guide allocated to it on the starter assembly 2122, and the fastener 2152 of the starter assembly can be positioned so that it is aligned with its respective guide only when the trigger assembly 2122 the element is correctly placed in the compartment 2130 to accommodate the node launch element. Also, similar to the engine mounting member 2148, the transmission unit mounting member 2150 and / or the starting element assembly mounting member 2152 can be arranged so that any one of them can prevent pairing of the first section 2112 of the protective casing with the second section 2114 of the protective casing if the user is trying to collect sections a protective casing 2112 and 2114 while the fastener 2150 of the transmission assembly and / or the fastener 2152 of the trigger assembly are not in a locked configuration. As described above, some of the detachable components 2103 can be detached and again jointly attached to the protective housing element 2112 in the form of a node, and they can be attached by a plurality of fasteners. For example, the operating unit 2106 can be attached to the protective housing portion 2112 by an engine fastener 2148, a transmission unit fastener 2150 and / or a starter assembly fastener 2152, as shown in FIG. 147. This design can provide an additional level of insurance for proper assembly, since failure to properly assemble any one of the components of the work assembly 2106 can prevent the corresponding fastener from reaching a locked configuration, which can prevent pairing of the first section 2112 of the protective casing with the second section 2114 of the protective casing if the user is trying to collect sections 2112 and 2114 of the protective casing while at least one of the fasteners remains short them to a locked configuration.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, some or all of the fasteners may be rotatably attached to the first portion 2112 of the protective housing and may be configured to move relative to the first portion 2112 of the protective housing from the unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to the locked configuration (see FIG. 147) and vice versa. In some examples, the second portion 2114 of the protective cover may include protruding fasteners (not shown) configured to receive the corresponding receiving element (not shown) internally with detachable components 2103 located in the first portion 2112 of the protective cover when sections the protective casing 2112 and 2114 are combined for pair engagement during assembly of the housing assembly 2102. The protruding fasteners can ensure that the detachable components 2103 remain attached to the first portion 2112 of the protective cover. In addition, the protruding fasteners can prevent pairing of the first portion 2112 of the protective cover and the second portion 2114 of the protective cover if the user tries to collect portions of the protective cover 2112 and 2114 while the protruding fasteners are not properly aligned with their respective receiving elements, for example, due to improper assembly made with the possibility of detaching components 2103, which can notify the user about the need to re-check the assembly made with the possibility ü disconnecting the components 2103 of the housing assembly 2102 for correct assembly. It will become clear to the reader that the positions of the protruding fasteners and their respective receiving elements can be reversed so that the protruding fasteners can be protruded from the detachable components 2103 and received in the corresponding receiving element in the second portion 2114 of the protective casing . In any case, the protruding fasteners and their respective receiving elements can be attached with the possibility of release to each other, for example, in meshing type lock connection. Other meshing mechanisms are contemplated herein.

In addition to the foregoing, some or all of the detachable components 2103 may include cam surfaces adapted to receive fasteners of the first portion of the protective cover 2112 as they move from an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to a locked configuration (see FIG. 147). Cam surfaces may be located on the outer surface of some or all of the detachable components 2103 and may allow respective fasteners to apply pressure to the detachable components 2103 in a locked configuration. For example, engine 2118 may include a cam surface along its guide. When moving the engine fastener 2148 from the unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to the locked configuration (see FIG. 147), the engine fastener 2148 can move along the cam surface on the engine 2118, which may allow the engine fastener 2148 to apply increasing pressure to an engine 2118, the maximum pressure being, for example, applied in a locked configuration. The pressure applied to the engine 2118 can help secure the engine in the engine compartment 2126.

As described above, the end effector may include a trigger that can be extended distally to staple the tissue with staples and / or cut the tissue. As shown in FIG. 155, the end effector 11260 may include a first jaw including a stop 11262 and a second jaw including a cassette 11264 with brackets. The end effector 11260 may further comprise, firstly, a housing and / or frame 11261 extending proximally from the stop 11262 and the cassette 11264 with brackets, and secondly, a trigger 11266 that can move relative to the housing 11261, the stop 11262 and the cassette 11264. The end effector 11260 may further comprise an articulation 11230 configured to provide articulation for the stop 11262 and cassette 11264 by means of an articulated rotation drive 11268. In the process of application, the end effector 11260 can be assembled on the barrel 11240 of the surgical instrument, for example, so that, firstly, the end effector body 11261 is connected to the barrel body 11241, which is able to fix the end effector body 11261, and secondly, the trigger the end effector element 11266 is connected to the barrel launch actuator 11246, capable of extending and retracting the end effector trigger element 11266, and / or, thirdly, the end effector pivot drive 11268 an actuator 11248 to pivoting barrel configured to extend and retract the actuator 11268 articulation of the end effector. During use, the trigger 11266 can be extended distally to move the stop 11262 from the open position in which the fabric can be positioned between the stop 11262 and the cassette 11264 to the closed position in which the stop 11262 presses the fabric against the cassette 11264. In various circumstances, the trigger 11266 may include a first engagement member configured to engage with the first jaw, and a second engagement member configured to engage with the second jaw when extending 11266 kovogo element distally so that the stop can be pivoted 11262 to 11264 from the cartridge by the action brackets engaging elements. In order to reopen the end effector and allow the stop 11262 to return to its open position, it is necessary that the trigger 11266 is sufficiently retracted. In various circumstances, the trigger 11266 may be stuck in the position of at least partial start, and as a result, it is not possible to re-open the stop 11262, thus making it difficult to remove the surgical instrument from the surgical field.

As shown in FIG. 156-161, an end effector, such as, for example, an end effector 11360, may include a trigger that can re-open the stop 11262 of the end effector 11360 even if the trigger of the end effector 11360 is stuck in the at least partial position launch. More specifically, the end effector 11360 may include a trigger element 11366 containing separable portions 11366a and 11366b, which may be configured to provide, in various cases, relative movement between the focus 11262 and the cassette 11264. As shown primarily in FIG. 157 and 158, the separable portions 11366a and 11366b can be held together by the locking member 11390 when the locking member 11390 is in a locked state, as shown in FIG. 158. Accordingly, when the locking member 11390 is in an unlocked state, the separable portions 11366a and 11366b can move relative to each other. The separable portion 11366a of the trigger element 11366 may comprise a first side portion 11363a, a second side portion 11367a and a cutting element portion 11365a located between the side portions 11363a and 11367a. In various circumstances, the side portions 11363a and 11367a may be held with the cutting element portion 11365a by one or more pins not shown in FIG. 157 and 158 passing through the openings 11396a formed therein. The separable portion 11366b of the trigger element 11366 may comprise a first side portion 11363b, a second side portion 11367b and a cutting element portion 11365b located between the side portions 11363b and 11367b. In various circumstances, the side portions 11363b and 11367b may be held with the cutting element portion 11365b by means of at least one holding element not shown in FIG. 157 and 158 engaged with leg 11396b extending from it. As the reader will understand, the aforementioned holding pins hold together the various components of the separable portion 11363b, while the aforementioned holding pins hold together the various components of the separable portion 11363b. As the reader will also understand, the locking element 11390, when it is in its locked position, holds the separable portions 11363a and 11363b together. In various cases, as shown primarily in FIG. 158, the locking element 11390 may include a first locking element 11397a configured to engage with the first locking portion 11361a of the first cutting element portion 11365a, and further, a second locking element 11397b configured to engage with the second locking section 11361b of the second cutting element portion 11365b. The first locking portion 11361a and the second locking portion 11361b may be configured to jointly and releasably hold the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b together. In various cases, the locking portions 11397a, 11397b can hold the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b together so that the cutting surfaces 11395a and 11395b of the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b respectively form a continuous or at least substantially continuous cutting surface. As shown in FIG. 158, the locking portions 11397a, 11397b of the locking element 11390 can be configured to jointly engage and hold the keys 11361a and 11361b of the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b, respectively. In various cases, a recess 11398 may be formed between the locking sections 11397a, 11397b, adapted to receive the keys 11361a and 11361b when the locking element 11390 is in its locked position. By pulling the locking member 11390, the proximal locking portions 11397a and 11397b can release the keys 11361a and 11361b. At this point, the locking member 11390 may no longer hold together the cutting member portions 11365a and 11365b. Thus, in such circumstances, separable portions 11366a and 11366b can move relative to each other. For example, the separable portion 11366a can move with the jaw 11262 when the jaw 11262 is reopened and, accordingly, the separable portion 11366b can remain with the cassette 11264. In view of the above, the locking member 11390 can be extended proximally to release the separable portions 11366a and 11366b if for example, the trigger element 11366 is stuck in the position of at least partial start.

As described above, the locking element 11390 can be extended proximally to release the separable portions 11366a and 11366b of the trigger element 11366. As shown in FIG. 159, the locking element 11390 can be extended proximally and / or pushed distally by the locking strip 11391. The locking strip 11391 may be located inside the end effector 11360 and may include a proximal end 11392 and a distal end 11393. The distal end 11393 of the locking strip 11391 may enter engagement with the locking element 11390. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the distal end 11393 may include a protrusion extending therefrom, which may be slidably arranged I inside the elongated groove 11399 formed in the locking element 11390. In order to extend the locking element 11390 proximally, you can pull the locking bar 11391 proximally until the protrusion comes into contact with the proximal end 11394 of the extended groove 11399, and the movement of the locking bar 11391 can transmitted to the locking element 11390. Accordingly, the protrusion can be made with the possibility of contact with the distal end 11395 of the elongated groove 11399 to push the locking element 11390 distally. As the reader will understand, as shown in FIG. 156, the trigger element 11366 may include one or more longitudinal grooves 11369 formed therein, which may be configured to permit passage of the protrusion of the locking plate through them and engage with the locking element 11390, as described above.

In addition to the above, as shown primarily in FIG. 156 and 160, the proximal end 11392 of the locking bar 11391 may comprise a fastening portion configured to engage with an actuator 11348 for fixing the barrel 11340 of the surgical instrument. As shown primarily in FIG. 160, the fixation actuator 11348 may include a distal end 11349 including a cutout, which, for example, may be configured to receive the proximal end 11392 of the locking strip 11391. The fixation actuator 11348 may further comprise a proximal end 11347, which the user of the surgical instrument may pull proximal and / or push distally to move the locking actuator 11348 and the locking bar 11391 proximal and / or distal, respectively. In use, the proximal end 11392 of the locking bar 11391 can be assembled at the distal end 11349 of the locking actuator 11348 when the end effector 11360 is assembled on the barrel 11340.

As described above, the motor can be used to extend and / or retract the trigger to accommodate the brackets from the end effector and / or cut the tissue trapped inside the end effector. In various cases, the engine may include a rotating drive shaft, the rotation of which can be converted into translational movement and transmitted to the trigger element, for example, such as a cutting element and / or a drive mechanism for the brackets. In at least one such case, the rotating drive shaft may include a threaded portion that is connected by a threaded connection to a sleeve including a threaded hole formed therein, and during use, the rotation of the sleeve may be limited so that the rotation of the drive shaft extends the cuff distally and / or retracts the cuff proximally, depending on the direction of rotation of the drive shaft. In some cases, the starter element may be stuck, and / or may be acted upon in another way by force or torque that exceeds the desired or predetermined maximum level of force or torque. As shown in FIG. 162-167, the engine assembly 12000 may include an engine 12010, a barrel 12020, and a slip clutch assembly 12030, wherein the slip clutch assembly 12030 may limit the force or torque that the engine 12010 can transmit to the barrel 12020. In various cases, as shown primarily in FIG. 162 and 163, the slip clutch assembly 12030 can transmit torque between the rotating output element 12012 of the engine drive 12010 and the barrel 12020. As shown in FIG. 165-167, the drive output element 12012 may include a substantially circular outer profile portion 12011 and a transition surface 12014, which in various cases may be flat or at least substantially flat. The outer profile of the drive output member 12012 may further include a first drive arm 12016 formed between the circular profile portion 12011 and the flat surface 12014, and further, a second drive shoulder 12018 formed between the opposite end of the flat surface 12014 and the circular profile portion 12011.

As shown in FIG. 165-167, the slip clutch assembly 12030 may include a drive member 12034 displaced in engagement with the drive output member 12012 by a biasing member or spring 12036. The drive member 12034 may be at least partially located within a retaining groove formed in the housing 12037 the slip clutch assembly 12030 so that the movement of the drive member 12034 with respect to the housing 12037 can be determined along an axis. As the reader will understand, the housing 12037 of the sliding clutch assembly can be mounted on the barrel 12020 so that the rotation of the housing 12037 and the barrel 12020 occurs synchronously. As it will also become clear to the reader, at least in certain circumstances, the drive element 12034 can transmit the rotational movement of the output drive element 12012 to the housing 12037. More specifically, when the output drive element 12012 is rotated in the first direction, as indicated by arrow 12017, to extend the trigger element distally, the output drive element 12012 can rotate relative to the drive element 12034 until the first drive arm 12016 comes into contact with the drive element 12034. As will become clear STUDIO first drive arm 12016 may remain in contact with the drive element 12034 as long as the biasing member 12036 is able to resist or at least sufficiently to resist radial movement of the drive member outwardly 12034. As long as the drive element 12034 is in contact with the first drive arm 12016, the engine 12010 can rotate the barrel 12020 in the direction in which the trigger element extends distally. In various cases, the motor 12010 can apply a torque to the drive output element 12012 that is large enough to bias the drive element 12034 radially outward so that the first drive arm 12016 of the output drive element 12012 slides under the action of the drive element 12034, resulting in the output element 12012 of the drive rotates relative to the drive element 12034, the housing 12037 of the slip clutch and the barrel 12020. In other words, the drive element 12034 can be deflected and functionally released from the motor of Tell 12010 when applied to the output member 12012 actuator torque in excess of a predetermined value or the maximum torque. By reducing the value of the torque applied to the output element 12012 of the drive below this predetermined or maximum value of the torque, the drive element 12034 can reengage with the first drive arm 12016, as a result of which the barrel 12020 can be functionally reengaged with the engine 12010 so that the barrel 12020 is rotated by the output element 12012 of the engine drive 12010.

In addition to the above, when the output drive element 12012 is rotated in the second direction, as indicated by arrow 12019, to retract the trigger element, the maximum output drive element 12012 can rotate relative to the drive element 12034 until the second drive arm 12018 comes into contact with the drive element 12034. As the reader will understand, the second drive arm 12018 may remain in contact with the drive element 12034 as long as the biasing element 12036 is able to resist, or at least the residual degree to resist radial movement of the drive element 12034 out. As long as the drive member 12034 is in contact with the second drive arm 12018, the engine 12010 can rotate the barrel 12020 in a direction that causes the trigger to retract proximally. In various cases, the motor 12010 can apply a torque to the drive output element 12012 that is large enough to bias the drive element 12034 radially outward so that the second drive arm 12018 of the output drive element 12012 slides under the action of the drive element 12034, resulting in the output element 12012 of the drive rotates relative to the drive element 12034, the housing 12037 of the slip clutch and the barrel 12020. In other words, the drive element 12034 can be deflected and functionally released from the motor of Tell 12010 when applied to the output member 12012 actuator torque in excess of a predetermined value or the maximum torque. By reducing the value of the torque applied to the output element 12012 of the drive below this predetermined or maximum value of the torque, the drive element 12034 can reengage with the second drive arm 12018, as a result of which the barrel 12020 can be functionally reengaged with the engine 12010 so that the barrel 12020 is rotated by the output element 12012 of the engine drive 12010.

In various cases, in addition to the foregoing, the first drive arm 12016 and the second drive arm 12018 may have the same configuration. In some cases, the first drive arm 12016 may be defined by a first radius of curvature, and the second drive arm 12018 may be defined by a second radius of curvature. In some cases, the first radius of curvature may be the same as the second radius of curvature. In such cases, the maximum (or sliding) torque that the motor 12010 can apply when the drive output element 12012 is rotated in the first direction 12017 can be the same or substantially the same as the maximum (or sliding) torque that the 12010 engine can apply when the output element 12012 of the drive is rotated in the second direction 12019. In some cases, the first radius of curvature may differ from the second radius of curvature. In such cases, the maximum (or sliding) torque that the motor 12010 can apply when the output element 12012 of the drive rotates in a first direction 12017 may differ from the maximum (or sliding) torque that the motor 12010 can apply when rotating the output element 12012 of the drive second direction 12019. In at least one such case, the first radius of curvature may be greater than the second radius of curvature, resulting in maximum (or sliding) torque in the first direction 12017 may be less than the maximum (or sliding) torque in the second direction 12019. In other words, the engine 12010 can apply more torque to the barrel 12020 when pulling the trigger element than when pulling the trigger element. Such cases may be advantageous when it is desirable to retract the trigger element so that, for example, the end effector of the surgical instrument can be re-opened and freed from the tissue. In at least one case, the first radius of curvature may be less than the second radius of curvature, as a result, the maximum (or sliding) torque in the first direction 12017 may be greater than the maximum (or sliding) torque in the second direction 12019. In other words, the engine 12010 can apply more torque to the barrel 12020 when extending the trigger element than when pulling the trigger element.

In addition to the above, as shown primarily in FIG. 163 and 164, the biasing member 12036 can be resiliently supported by a spring ring 12032 located within the annular channel 12031 formed in the sleeve housing 12037. In such cases, the snap ring 12032 and the biasing element 12036 can act together to apply a radially inward biasing force and / or resisting the movement of the drive element 12034 radially outward. In various cases, the spring ring 12032 may comprise an annular housing including a first free end 12033 and a second free end 12034, wherein the annular housing can elastically expand when the above-described force is applied radially outwardly and elastically compress when this force in the direction radially outward stops or decreases. In such cases, the first free end 12033 of the spring ring 12032 can move relative to the second free end 12034.

The devices described herein can be disposed of after a single use, or they can be implemented many times. However, in any case, the device can be restored for re-use after at least one application. Recovery may include any combination of the stages of disassembling the device, followed by cleaning or replacing specific parts, and further assembly. In particular, the device can be disassembled and any number of specific parts or parts of the device can be selectively replaced or removed in any combination. After cleaning and / or replacing specific parts, the device can be reassembled for subsequent use either in the restoration workshop or by the surgical team immediately before the surgery. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that a variety of disassembly, cleaning / replacing, and reassembly techniques can be used to rebuild the device. The use of such techniques, as well as the resulting reconditioned device are included in the scope of this application.

Preferably, the subject matter described herein will undergo treatment prior to surgery. First, after receiving a new or already used tool, it is cleaned if necessary. Then the instrument can be sterilized. According to one sterilization method, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, for example a plastic bag or a Tyvek bag (TYVEK). The container and instrument are then placed in a radiation field that is able to penetrate into the container, such as gamma radiation, x-rays or fast electrons. Radiation kills bacteria on the instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument can then be stored in a sterile container. A sealed container keeps the instrument sterile until it is opened in a medical facility.

Any patent, publication or other description material, in whole or in part, which is indicated as incorporated herein by reference, is included in this document only to the extent that the material included does not contradict the existing definitions, provisions and other description material presented in this description. Thus, to the extent necessary, the disclosure, as explicitly presented herein, takes precedence over any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference. Any material or part thereof, indicated as incorporated herein by reference, but contrary to existing definitions, provisions, or other description material presented herein, will be included in this document only to the extent that between the included material and the existing description material no contradictions arise.

Although the present invention is described as having examples of configurations, the present invention can be further modified within the spirit and scope of the description. Therefore, it is intended that this application cover all possible variations, methods of applying or adapting the invention using its general principles. In addition, it is intended that the present application cover such deviations from the present description that fall within the well-known or generally accepted practice in the field to which the present invention relates.

Claims (24)

1. A surgical instrument containing: trunk; end effector extending distally from the trunk; and a housing extending proximal from the barrel, the housing comprising: first protective section; second protective area; a working unit located in the first protective portion, the working unit comprising a guide and configured to be detached from the first protective portion, wherein the second protective portion is removably connected to the first protective portion to enable disconnection of the working assembly from the first protective portion; and at least one fastening element meshed with the first protective section before attaching the working unit to the first protective section and configured to move along the guide, while at least one fastening element is movable to attach the working node to the first protective section ; moreover, the working unit contains an engine, and the first protective section contains a compartment for accommodating the engine, configured to receive the engine, and at least one mounting element includes a mounting element of the engine, made with the possibility of movement to secure the engine in the compartment for placing the engine. 2. The surgical instrument of claim 1, wherein the at least one fastener is movable between an unlocked position and a locked position. 3. The surgical instrument of claim 1, wherein the at least one fastener is operable to engage and move along a guide to a locked position. 4. The surgical instrument according to claim 1, in which the movement of at least one fastener along the guide to the locked position is prevented if the work node is not correctly positioned in the first protective portion. 5. The surgical instrument of claim 1, wherein the engine compartment contains a wall including assembly instructions for locating the engine in the engine compartment. 6. The surgical instrument according to claim 1, wherein the engine comprises a curved surface, wherein the engine mount is movable along the curved surface to secure the engine in the engine compartment. 7. A housing for use with a surgical instrument, wherein the surgical instrument includes a barrel extending in a distal direction from the barrel, and an end effector extending in a distal direction from the barrel, the housing comprising: a detachable work unit containing a guide; a first protective portion configured to accommodate a detachable work unit; a second protective section configured to be removably connected to the first protective section to enable disconnection of the detachable work unit from the first protective section; and at least one fastening element meshed with the first protective section before attaching the detachable working unit to the first protective section and configured to move along the guide, while at least one fastening element is movable to attach the detachable working unit to the first protective area; moreover, the working unit contains an engine, and the first protective section contains a compartment for accommodating the engine, configured to receive the engine, and at least one mounting element includes a mounting element of the engine, made with the possibility of movement to secure the engine in the compartment for placing the engine. 8. The housing of claim 7, wherein the at least one fastener is movable between an unlocked position and a locked position. 9. The housing according to claim 7, in which at least one fastening element is adapted to engage and move along the guide to a locked position. 10. The housing according to claim 7, in which the movement of at least one fastener along the guide to the locked position is prevented if the work unit is not correctly positioned in the first protective portion. 11. The housing according to claim 7, wherein the engine compartment contains a wall including assembly instructions for locating the engine in the engine compartment.

Images